Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
M3
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M3.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW M3's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW M3 throughout an extended ser-
vice life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
© 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 014 958
US English II/08, 08 03 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic-
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 246.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
23 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
40 Adjustments
51 Transporting children safely
54 Driving
67 Everything under control
81 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
92 Lamps
96 Climate
102 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
114 Things to remember when driving
119 BMW M3 engineering
Navigation
124 Starting the navigation system
126 Destination entry
139 Destination guidance
148 What to do if …
Entertainment
152 On/off and settings
156 Radio
162 Satellite radio
165 CD player and CD changer
171 AUX-In port
172 USB-audio interface
Communications
178 Telephoning
193 BMW Assist
Mobility
204 Refueling
206 Wheels and tires
212 Maintenance
214 Care
218 Under the hood
223 Replacing components
230 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
238 Technical data
242 Short commands for the voice command
system
246 Everything from A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Notes
6
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
3 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
*
45
4 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor
*
45
1
Safety switch for electric rear
windows 38
2
Opening and closing windows 37
5
Parking lamps/low beams 92
Low beams 92
Automatic headlamp control
*
92
Adaptive Head Light
*
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7 Instrument cluster 12
10 Ignition lock 54
11 Buttons on the steering wheel
12 Horn: the entire surface
13 Adjusting the steering wheel 46
15 Releasing the hood 218
16 Opening the luggage compartment lid 33
6
Turn signals 63
High beams, headlamp flasher 94
Roadside parking lamps
*
94
Computer 68
Settings and information about the
vehicle 71
Instrument lighting 94
8
Windshield wipers 64
Rain sensor
*
64
9
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 54
Telephone
*
:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call, starting dialing
*
selected
phone numbers. Redialing if
no phone number is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice com-
mand system
*
23
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling through phone book and
lists with stored phone numbers
MDrive
*
, calling up individual
settings 47
Individually programmable
*
47
Individually programmable 47
14
Cruise control 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 67
5 Shift Lights
*
61
6 Engine oil temperature 68
7 Display for
> Clock 67
> Outside temperature 67
> Indicator and warning lamps 77
> With dual clutch transmission:
Computer 68
8 Display for
> Gear display M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic
*
57
> With manual transmission:
Computer 68
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 72
> Odometer and trip odometer 67
> Checking oil level 219
> Settings and information 71
> There is a Check Control
message 77
9 Fuel gauge 68
10 Resetting the trip odometer 67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 77.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Parking lamps/low beams 92
High beams/headlamp flasher 94
Parking brake applied 56
MDrive
*
48
M Dynamic Mode
*
82
Lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive forces in
order to maintain driving stability 82
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on exhaust emissions 213
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on exhaust
emissions 213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for voice command system
*
and for telephone in hands-free mode
*
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call
*
230
3 Reading lamps 95
4 Glass roof, electric
*
38
5 Interior lamps 95
6 Passenger airbag status lamp
*
90
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Flat Tire Monitor FTM
*
84
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
*
86
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control
12 Ejecting audio CD 152
13 Changing
> Radio station 156
> Track 166
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD 124
18 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-
tally in four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 82
21 Electronic Damper Control EDC
*
84
22 M Engine Dynamics Control POWER 63
23 Drive for navigation DVD 124
24 Programmable memory keys 21
25 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust-
ing volume 152
26 Drive for audio CD 152
Air distribution to the
windshield 97
Air distribution to the upper body
area 97
Air distribution to the footwell 97
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 98
Cooling function 99
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC 98
Recirculated-air mode 98
Maximum cooling 98
Residual heat mode 99
Air flow rate 98
Defrosting windows 99
Rear window defroster 99
17
Heated seats
*
43
Roller sun blind
*
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position. The
following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the indi-
vidual functions is described in connection with
the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening start menu
3 Controller
The controller can be used to select menu
items and to adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrow 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Push, arrow 6
Operate the controller only when traffic
and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone
*
> BMW Assist
*
or BMW TeleServices
*
Navigation
> Navigation system
*
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the
average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
> AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
*
for
external audio device
Climate
> Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Parked car operation
menu
> Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> M settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and dates
for statutory inspections
> Settings for telephone
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The start menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via five
menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Calling up menu items in the start menu
As of radio readiness, refer to page 54:
Via the start menu you can call up the four menu
items of Communication, Navigation, Entertain-
ment and Climate by moving the controller for-
wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.
You can call up the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Convenient call-up of menu items
The convenient call-up function enables you to:
> Call up a menu item from the start menu in
the view last displayed
> Switch directly between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without having to press the button
To do so, move the controller in the corre-
sponding direction and hold it for more than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The
active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last
selected.
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility
of accessing other menu items that are not
currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as
numerical values.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
The following is a general description of opera-
tions using iDrive.
For an exemplary step-by-step application refer
to Setting the time, page 74.
1 Selecting a menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight marker
moves
> Menu items in white can be selected by
highlighting them
2 Activating a menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is executed
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Switching between fields:
> Briefly move the controller to the left,
right, forward, or backward
> Release the controller
> The active field is brighter in color
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn the controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirm by changing the field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD or
> Telephone
*
in "Communication":
Name of the connected mobile phone,
network search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*
:
Active voice connection with a
BMW Assist service
2 Entertainment audio output off
3 Display for traffic information
*
:
"TI":
Traffic information for the navigation sys-
tem can be received and transmission is
switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
5 It is possible to make calls
*
if the mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle
Reception strength of mobile phone
network, display depending on mobile
phone
6 Time
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice command system
*
.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:
> The computer or the trip computer
*
> The arrow or map view in vehicles with nav-
igation system
*
> The current position
*
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching assistance window on/off
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
To turn back on, switch to the assistance win-
dow and press the controller.
Switching Control Display
off/on
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
Press the controller to switch on.
Programmable memory keys
Using the programmable memory keys, you can
store and execute certain iDrive functions:
> Navigation
*
destinations
> Entertainment:
> Radio stations
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer
> AUX
> Telephone: phone numbers
The assignment of the programmable memory
keys is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Storing functions
Navigation* destinations
1. Select the navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or address book.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
Special features:
> If destination guidance and the map view
have been started, the current destination is
stored.
> If the destination is entered via map, the
coordinates in the cross-hairs are stored,
not the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
1. Enter the phone number or select the num-
ber from a list of stored phone numbers, e.g.
the A-Z list.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
If the phone number is associated with a name,
the name is also stored.
Entertainment
The item stored in the Entertainment menu is
the source that is playing at the time of storage,
e.g. a radio station, irrespective of what was
selected on the Control Display.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
tion or CD.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
iDrive
22
If the car is equipped with two drives and a
CD with compressed audio files is played,
the current track is stored.<
Executing a function
... Press the key.
The function is executed immediately. This
means that, for example, if a phone number is
selected, the connection is established, or if a
navigation destination is called up, destination
guidance is started.
Displaying memory key assignments
You can have the assignment of a memory key
displayed by touching the key with your finger.
Please do not wear gloves when doing so.
Touching the keys with an object such as a pen
will not work.
Displaying brief information
... Touch the key.
The key assignment is displayed.
Navigation destination
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
... Touch the key for a longer
period.
Clearing key assignments
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory
keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. It is not neces-
sary to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice command system is operating, so that the
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, refer to page 79.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
command system is ready to receive spo-
ken commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis-
play.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Commands
Having the possible commands read
aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice
command system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Voice command system
24
item on the Control Display.
To have the possible commands read out to
you:
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the
commands available for operating the CD
player and CD changer are read out
*
.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 242.
Opening the start menu
Example: selecting a track
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD on}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Notes
For information on voice control of the
telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient
access
*
, the remote control contains a replace-
able battery, refer to page 36.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile below.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 212.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 105
> Driver's door, refer to page 31
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the set-
tings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if convenient access
*
is
in use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 21
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 32
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi-
tion after unlocking, refer to page 43
> Programming buttons on the steering
wheel, refer to page 47
> MDrive
*
, refer to page 48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Calling up the preferred program of the M
Engine Dynamics Control POWER and
Electronic Damper Control EDC
*
when
starting the vehicle, refer to Key-dependent
settings on page 49
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 63
> Settings for the displays on the Control Dis-
play and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 76
> Date format, refer to page 76
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 80
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 79
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 71
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC
*
, refer to page 81
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 92
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 93
> Daytime running lamps, refer to page 93
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated-air control, set-
ting temperature, air flow rate and distribu-
tion, refer to page 97 ff
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume, refer to page 153
> Tone control, refer to page 153
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 153
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
> In cars with convenient access
*
, via the
handles on the driver's and front passen-
ger's doors
The anti-theft system is also operated at the
same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. In addition, if the remote control is used,
the welcome lamps, interior lamps and the
door's courtesy lamps
*
are switched on or off.
The alarm system
*
is also armed or disarmed.
For further details of the alarm system,
refer to
page 34.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 32.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
*
and the
welcome lamps come on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The windows and the glass roof
*
are opened.
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside the vehicle because it
cannot be unlocked from the inside without
special knowledge.<
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short
distance, regardless of whether it was locked or
unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings
backwards and up when opened. Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance. To avoid lock-
ing yourself out by accident, do not place the
remote control in the cargo bay. A previously
locked luggage compartment lid is locked again
after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the lug-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-
ently unlocked.<
Setting confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal
*
.
8. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 28. The remote control for convenient
access
*
contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 36.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 29.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside the vehicle because it
cannot be unlocked from the inside without
special knowledge.<
Convenient operation
You can operate the windows and the glass
roof
*
via the door lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid when the doors
are closed, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
drive off.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Luggage compartment lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid
opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on
the remote control for a longer period. The lug-
gage compartment lid will open slightly. It can
now be swung upwards.
Opening manually
The integrated key of the remote control, refer
to page 28, fits the luggage compartment lid
lock.
Turn the key all the way to the left: the luggage
compartment lid opens.
If you open the luggage compartment lid
using the key while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off
an alarm, refer to page 34.<
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The luggage compartment lid is locked and
cannot be unlocked using the central locking
system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the luggage compart-
ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan-
tage when valet parking, for example. Locking
the glove compartment, refer to page 106.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.<
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage com-
partment lid is opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 35
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there is an interruption in the power
supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid
using the button of the remote control even
if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 30.
The lid is locked and monitored again as soon
as it is closed.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 29.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are
not properly closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to mon-
itor the remaining areas, and the indicator
lamp flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and
the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass roof must
be completely closed
*
.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to enter your
vehicle without needing to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre-
sponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
separately
> Starting the engine
> Convenient closure
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked when the vehicle detects
that the remote control currently in use is
outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
In general, there is no difference between using
convenient access or pressing the buttons on
the remote control to carry out the functions
mentioned above. You should therefore first
familiarize yourself with the instructions on
opening and closing starting on page 28.
Special features regarding the use of conve-
nient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows or the glass roof, the
system is checking whether a remote control is
inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or
closing procedure, if necessary.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Convenient closure
For convenient closure, keep your finger on the
surface, arrow 2.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage
compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen.
The hazard warning flashers flash and an
acoustic signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
start/stop button, refer to page 54.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch,
otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition switch, refer to page 54.
Malfunction
Convenient access may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this happens, open or close
the vehicle via the buttons on the remote con-
trol or using the integrated key. To start the
engine afterward, insert the remote control into
the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 28.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
Opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
There are separate switches in the rear seat
armrests.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
Convenient operation
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29
or 31. For information on closing with conve-
nient access, refer to Locking on page 30.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise the
pinch protection system could be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-
dren, for example. When the safety function is
switched on, the LED comes on.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise
unchecked closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<
Glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
> The open glass roof automatically travels
into the raised position. The sliding visor
remains completely open.
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or door lock, refer to page 29
or 31.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the raised position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
*
supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 223, into the
opening provided. Move the glass roof in
the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
40
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 51.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard,
otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their
heads against the side or head airbags, other-
wise serious injuries could result if the airbags
suddenly deployed.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 89.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 42.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise
its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 44.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 42, and on damaged safety
belts on page 45.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Thigh support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 40 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints below.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
42
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
Front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Rear seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
The center head restraint is not height-adjust-
able.
Removing
Only with through-loading system
*
:
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Only remove the head restraints if no pas-
sengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall
head restraints before transporting passengers
in the rear.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Folding head restraints down and back
up
Folding down:
Press the button, arrow 1.
Folding up:
Pull the head restraint.
Depending on the equipment version, it may be
possible to fold down the outer rear head
restraints as well.
Only fold the head restraints down if no
passengers will be sitting in the rear. Fold
up the head restraints before transporting pas-
sengers in the rear.<
Heated seats*
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx.
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror
positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-
port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 54.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the
LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Call-up
Do not call up memory while you are driv-
ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-
ment could result in an accident.<
Convenience mode
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 54.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
44
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 54.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last stored is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is
reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
9. Press the controller.
Switching off automatic call-up
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 40 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
On the rear seats, the center belt buckle marked
with the letters CENTER is solely intended for
the center passenger.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 40.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front
seats
The indicator lamps come on and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph
or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is
not fastened, if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger
unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child-
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-
tion properly.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor
*
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar-
row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors
that were folded in by hand back out into their
correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are
folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with
button 3, to prevent them from being damaged
due to the width of the vehicle.<
Automatic heating*
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or transmission posi-
tion R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior and exterior mirrors*,
automatic dimming feature
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors
*
is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Programmable buttons on the steering
wheel
Depending on the equipment, you can individu-
ally program either one or two buttons:
This setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller.
A list showing various functions is dis-
played:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice messages from the navigation
system
*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanent shut-off of outside air, refer
to Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC on page 98
> "Mute on / off"
To mute the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
To switch the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
*
To show/hide the phone book or last dis-
played list of stored phone numbers
> "Next entertainment source"
To change the audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. With two programmable buttons: select the
button and press the controller.
Operating a function
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one button:
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button for a longer period.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button briefly.
> To cancel a voice instruction during an
announcement:
Press the button briefly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
MDrive*
With MDrive you can configure several individ-
ual settings for your vehicle on the Control Dis-
play and activate them using the button on
the steering wheel.
Configuring settings
You can set MDrive on the Control Display
when the ignition is switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "M settings" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
The functions contained in MDrive are dis-
played:
> "M DKG Drivelogic"
M dual clutch transmission with Drivel-
ogic: shift modes and Drivelogic drive
programs, refer to page 60
> "EDC"
Programs of the Electronic Damper
Control EDC
*
, refer to page 84
> "DSC"
Dynamic Stability Control and
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 82
> "POWER"
Programs of the M Engine Dynamics
Control, refer to page 63
> "Servotronic"
Programs of the Servotronic, refer to
page 89
> "Shift lights"
Shift Lights, refer to page 61
You can reset all MDrive settings to their
default values:
> "Reset to default"
5. Select the desired function.
6. Press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired set-
ting.
"Unchanged" retains the current setting
made outside of MDrive.
8. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating the settings
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. The settings made
on the Control Display for the functions
in MDrive are active.
Pressing the button again deactivates MDrive.
If the indicator lamp flashes after the but-
ton was pressed, MDrive was unable to
respond because the Antilock Brake System
ABS or Dynamic Stability Control DSC are cur-
rently regulating driving stability. Press the
button again when the indicator lamp is no
longer flashing.<
You can change individual settings outside of
MDrive even when MDrive is activated, e.g.
using the buttons on the center console. To
reactivate all settings made on the Control Dis-
play for MDrive: press the button twice.
Key-dependent settings
For the remote control currently in use, you can
set your preferred program for the M Engine
Dynamics Control and Electronic Damper Con-
trol EDC. These presettings are called up when
the engine is started.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "M settings" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Key-dependent settings" and press
the controller.
The available functions are displayed:
> "POWER"
Programs of the M Engine Dynamics
Control, refer to page 63
> "EDC"
Programs of the Electronic Damper
Control EDC
*
, refer to page 84
> "Shift lights"
Shift Lights, refer to page 61
5. Select the desired function.
6. Press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired set-
ting.
8. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
The rear center seat is not suitable for installing
child-restraint systems for all age groups,
approved for the age group in question.
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child-restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child-
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child-restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 90.
Installing child-restraint
systems
Observe the child-restraint system man-
ufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems.
Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin-
ished.<
Standard child-restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child-restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passen-
ger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. Do not change the setting after install-
ing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's
stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-
ited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-
ting, refer to page 42.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
52
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child-restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system, otherwise the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest, otherwise the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Rear seats with through-loading
system*
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protec-
tive caps.
Rear seats without through-loading
system*
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located at the positions indicated
by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the
backrest.
Child-restraint system with tether
strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure
child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
There are three additional anchors for child-
restraint systems with tether straps, see
arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise the strap will not properly secure the child-
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint sys-
tem
If necessary, fold the head restraints
*
upward
before use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
On journeys
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear door:
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
Press the safety switch for the power windows,
refer to page 38, if children are traveling on the
rear seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
54
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Convenient access*
If the car is equipped with convenient access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock under special circumstances, refer to
page 35.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: when you press the
start/stop button while the clutch is
depressed, the engine starts.
M dual clutch transmission: when you press the
start/stop button while the brake is depressed,
the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with convenient access
*
, by touch-
ing the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 36
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in neutral and forcefully
apply the parking brake to prevent the car from
moving.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
To stop the starting procedure: press the start/
stop button again.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the start/stop button.
The engine starts with the selector level in any
position. Driving off: with the engine running,
move the selector level from the middle position
Β in the desired direction.
Every time you start the engine, sequential
mode is activated in program S3 if you lightly
press the selector lever to the right to position
D/S with the brake pedal depressed.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 54.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
1. Press the start/stop button.
If N is engaged when you switch off the
engine, you are notified visually and acous-
tically.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
56
3. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 54. This automati-
cally engages transmission position P.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when you perform the
following steps:
1. Insert the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, into the ignition lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Transmission position P is engaged:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> When you remove the remote control from
the ignition lock
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic*
The concept
The M dual clutch transmission with Drivelogic
is an automated manual transmission with two
clutches and a partial transmission in which an
electro-hydraulic system takes over clutch
action and shifting.
With the M dual clutch transmission, gears are
changed without interruption of the traction
force.
The M dual clutch transmission is operated
using the selector lever and two shift paddles
on the steering wheel.
The transmission offers you the following func-
tions:
> Selection between manual and automatic
operation: sequential mode or drive mode
> Selection between different drive pro-
grams, Drivelogic, refer to page 60
> Shift Lights, refer to page 61
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against selecting the wrong gear even in
sequential mode
> Launch Control, refer to page 62
> Automatic throttle blip
> Low Speed Assistant
System limitations
The M dual clutch transmission is equipped
with an overheating protection system that pro-
tects the clutch against extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow
when the transmission becomes too
warm. Avoid high engine loads and
driving off frequently. When the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up red and
the fuel supply to the engine is cut off. You can-
not continue driving until the transmission has
cooled down.
Avoid driving off frequently with high accelera-
tion and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis-
sion to overheat.
In traffic congestion or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to the informa-
tion below.
Low Speed Assistant
The Low Speed Assistant supports you when
driving at very low speeds: the vehicle moves at
walking speed and automatically controls the
engine speed. You can also use the Low Speed
Assistant when rocking the vehicle out of deep
snow. To do so, shift between reverse gear and
the forward position without pressing the brake.
Activating
1. Engage a drive position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator.
The vehicle rolls at the minimum speed. Do not
press the brake continuously as this may cause
the transmission to overheat.
Deactivating
Brake the vehicle to a stop to deactivate the
Low Speed Assistant.
Selector lever positions
> R: reverse gear
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
58
> Β: middle position
> N: neutral
> +: shift up manually
> –: shift down manually
> D/S: change between drive mode and
sequential mode
The selector lever locks in position R. In other
transmission positions, it stays in the middle
position; the gear positions are engaged by
pressing lightly in the desired direction.
The gear position currently engaged is indi-
cated by LEDs in the selector lever.
Shiftlock
When the vehicle is stationary, press the brake
pedal before shifting out of N, otherwise the
desired gear will not be engaged.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
If the driving situation demands, e.g. when
downshifting on a slippery road, the M dual
clutch transmission automatically disengages
and engages the clutch, i.e. it is not necessary
to manually engage the neutral position.
N engages when you open the driver's
door while the engine is running, your
safety belt is not fastened and you activate nei-
ther the brake pedal nor the accelerator. To
drive off after closing the driver's door and fas-
tening your safety belt, move the selector lever
to position N first and then to the desired drive
position.<
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off if you leave the remote
control in the ignition lock. Use this function in
an automatic car wash, for example, refer to
page 56.<
S sequential mode
Shift up or down using the shift paddles or the
selector lever. You do not need to lift your foot
off the accelerator when doing so.
Shift from sequential mode to drive mode:
Press the selector lever to the right in the D/S
direction.
Shift back to sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or press the
selector level to the right in the D/S direction
again.
On a level road, you can drive off in second gear,
e.g. on slippery roads.
The M dual clutch transmission assists you in
the following situations:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that would cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> When the vehicle stops, the transmission
automatically shifts down to first gear.
> Shortly before the vehicle slows down to
below the minimum speed of the gear cur-
rently engaged, the transmission automati-
cally shifts down without requiring your
intervention.
Rapid downshifting: in sequential mode, you
can skip several gears to achieve optimal accel-
eration. To do so, press the accelerator past the
resistance point and pull the left shift paddle
once or press the selector lever forward once.
D drive mode
In drive mode, all forward gears are shifted auto-
matically.
Shift from drive mode to sequential mode: shift
using the shift paddles or the selector lever, or
press the selector level to the right in the D/S
direction.
Shift back to drive mode: press the selector
lever to the right in the D/S direction again.
Kick-down: to accelerate rapidly, e.g. when
passing, press the accelerator down past the
resistance point. This provides maximum accel-
eration.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
P Park
P engages automatically when you switch
off the engine unless N is engaged and
the remote control remains in the ignition lock,
refer to page 54. As soon as you remove the
remote control from the ignition lock, P
engages regardless of the position of the selec-
tor lever.<
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Engaged gear 1 to 7, R, N, P
2 Selected drive program,
corresponds to the number of illuminated
fields, refer to Drivelogic, page 60
3 The gear currently engaged is displayed
together with a D in drive mode
At very low outside temperatures, this display
may not be functional. The engaged driving
direction is indicated by the LEDs on the selec-
tor lever.
Changing gears
Via the selector lever
> To shift up, pull back the selector lever.
> To shift down, push it forward.
Via the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
> To shift up, pull the right-hand shift paddle
+ briefly.
> To shift down, pull the left-hand shift paddle
– briefly.
Unlocking the transmission lock
manually
If a power failure occurs, e.g. if the battery
is discharged or disconnected, the trans-
mission lock must be released manually, other-
wise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehi-
cle cannot be towed.<
Release the transmission lock manually for tow-
ing only and forcefully apply the parking brake
beforehand to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
After parking the vehicle, lock the transmission
lock again.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Push the black cover forward using the
screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer
to page 223.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
60
4. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of
the white lever, arrow 1.
5. Pull the screwdriver back all the way, arrow
2. The transmission lock is released.
6. Carefully remove the screwdriver, for exam-
ple to avoid accidentally engaging the
transmission lock during towing.
After parking the vehicle, lock the trans-
mission lock again. Otherwise there is a
danger of the vehicle rolling.<
Locking
1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening of
the white lever and press forward.
The transmission lock is locked again.
2. Fold back the black cover until it engages
audibly.
3. Clip the sleeve of the selector lever back
into place.
Jump-starting and towing, refer to page 232.
Drivelogic
Various drive programs are available to you via
Drivelogic.
After every change between sequential and
drive mode, the program selected last in each
case is active. Exception: after the first change
from sequential to drive mode, drive program 3
is active.
In drive mode
Five drive programs are available for selection,
from winter program/balanced 1 to sporting and
highly dynamic 5.
In sequential mode
You can choose between six drive programs,
from winter program/balanced 1 to sporty
puristic 6.
Program 6 is available when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated, refer to page 82. If DSC
is activated, the program changes from 6 to 5.
To maintain driving stability, activate DSC
whenever possible.<
Selecting the drive program via the
button in the center console
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
drive program is displayed in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 59.
Selecting the drive program via the
button on the steering wheel
You can also activate your preferred drive pro-
gram via the button on the steering wheel,
refer to MDrive on page 48.
You can set MDrive on the Control Display
when the ignition is switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select "M settings" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
5. Select "M DKG Drivelogic" and press the
controller. The first setting is highlighted.
6. Turn the controller to set the drive mode or
sequential mode.
"Unchanged" retains the current settings
made outside of MDrive.
7. Press the controller to select the drive pro-
grams.
8. Turn the controller to set the drive program.
9. Press the controller.
Shift Lights
To achieve the best possible acceleration in
sequential mode when using a sporty driving
style, the Shift Lights in the instrument cluster
indicate the best shift point just before the max-
imum engine speed is reached.
1. As the vehicle approaches its maximum
engine speed, the yellow LEDs 1 light up
consecutively to indicate the impending
shift point.
2. At the latest, shift when the red LEDs 2 light
up.
The LEDs flash when the maximum allowable
engine speed is reached. When the maximum
engine speed is exceeded, the fuel supply is cut
off to protect the engine. Avoid engine speeds
in this range at all costs.
Switching the Shift Lights on/off
For operating principle, refer to page 71.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
2. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator
lever up or down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display accompanied by
the word "SET".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
62
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to select:
>
Shift Lights activated.
>
Shift Lights deactivated.
5. Press button 2.
After the ignition is switched off and the engine
is restarted, the status set for the remote con-
trol in use is active, refer to Key-dependent set-
tings on page 49.
You can set and call up the preferred status
of the Shift Lights via the MDrive, refer to
page 48.
Brightness of Shift Lights
The brightness of the Shift Lights can be set
using the brightness level of the instrument
cluster, refer to Instrument lighting on page 94.
Launch Control
Launch Control enables you to drive off with an
optimal vehicle acceleration on a high grip road
surface.
Do not use Launch Control too often, as
the higher loads on the vehicle lead to
premature component wear.<
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature, i.e. after driving con-
tinuously for at least 6 miles/10 km.
1. Press the brake while the engine is running.
2. Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC,
refer to page 83.
3. Select sequential mode with Drivelogic
drive program 6.
4. With the vehicle stationary, press the selec-
tor lever forward and hold. A flag symbol
appears in the instrument cluster.
5. Press the accelerator down all the way. The
engine speed when driving off is controlled.
6. If you wish, you can adjust the drive-off
engine speed by up to approx. 500 rpm:
> Increase the drive-off engine speed by
approx. 100 rpm: press the lever beyond
the resistance point, arrow 1.
> Decrease the drive-off engine speed by
approx. 100 rpm: pull the lever beyond
the resistance point, arrow 2.
> Reset the drive-off engine speed: press
the lever upward or downward, arrows 3.
7. The vehicle accelerates when you release
the selector lever. Keep the accelerator
pressed all the way down.
8. The transmission shifts up automatically as
long as the accelerator is pressed all the
way down.
Launch Control only becomes available again
after a certain distance has been driven.
Do not use Launch Control during the vehicle
break-in period, refer to page 114.
To maintain driving stability, activate DSC
whenever possible.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
M Engine Dynamics Control
With M Engine Dynamics Control you can influ-
ence how sportily your vehicle should respond
to movements of the accelerator. Three pro-
grams are available to you.
"Normal" program
In the "Normal" program, the engine responds
gently to accelerator movements, which is ideal
for city traffic or on snow, for example.
"Sport" program
The "Sport" program provides for a more spon-
taneous response of the engine to accelerator
movements.
"Sport Plus"* program
In the "Sport Plus" program, the engine
responds to accelerator movements with high
spontaneity and uncompromising sportiness.
The "Sport Plus" program can only be activated
via MDrive, refer to MDrive on page 48.
Selecting a program
Press the POWER button to switch between
the "Normal" and "Sport" programs.
In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" programs, the
LED in the POWER button lights up.
You can also set and call up your preferred
program via MDrive, refer to page 48.
After the ignition is switched off and the engine
is restarted, the program set for the remote
control in use is active, refer to Key-dependent
settings on page 49.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
64
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 4.8USquarts/4.5liters.
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster. This function is
not available when DSC is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving
66
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If engine braking power is
insufficient on a downhill grade, the stored
speed may be exceeded.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed lightly to the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerate slightly, increase speed steadily:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerate strongly, increase speed in intervals
of 10:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you shift or depress the clutch
> When you deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
When the ignition is switched off, the stored
speed value is cleared and can no longer be
called up.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock, refer to
Computer on page 68
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 71.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 74.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, otherwise there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
The prewarning field, arrow 1, and the red warn-
ing field, arrow 2, change in relation to the
engine temperature. The permissible engine
speed increases with increased engine temper-
ature. Avoid engine speeds in the prewarning
field, if possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
68
Never drive at engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the engine speed is limited to
protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi-
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis-
play.
Check coolant level, refer to page 222.
Engine oil temperature
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 1757/806 and approx. 2507/
1206.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.6 US gal/
63 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 204.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis-
play.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Oil level, refer to Checking oil level on
page 219
> Average fuel consumption
> Speed
> No information
M dual clutch transmission:
Outside temperature, time, cruising
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
range, oil level, average fuel consumption and
speed appear in the top display.<
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 71.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 70, you
can have the average consumption for another
trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2seconds.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for
operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Car Data" is selected and press the
controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, refer to page 126
> Cruising range
> Distance to destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, refer to page 126
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
70
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to
your destination.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically entered during
destination guidance.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday
trip.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all
values to zero:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip com-
puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Onboard info"
> "Trip computer"
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 68
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 94
4 Calling up Check Control 77
5 Setting the time 74
6 Setting the date 76
7 Viewing service requirement display 72
8 Switching Shift Lights
*
on/off 61
Exiting displays
The outside-temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Units of measure
You can set units of measure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Units" is selected and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
6. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
7. Select the desired measurement unit and
press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions 2 Service requirements
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
Supplementary information
You can call up detailed information about the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Turn the con-
troller until "Status" is selected and press
the controller.
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if
applicable, inspections required by law is dis-
played.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 76, otherwise
the effectiveness of Condition Based Service
CBS is not ensured.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select and press the controller.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 212.
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
12h/24h format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the controller forwards
to move the highlight marker to the upper-
most field.
6. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Adjusting settings
8. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
9. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The system accepts the new time.
Switching on the hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
Setting the 12h/24h format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Date" and press the controller.
5. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first date display setting is selected.
6. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
8. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Setting the date format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes-
sage includes indicator and warning lamps in
the instrument cluster and, in some circum-
stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes-
sages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. You can view the Check Control
messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond,
refer to page 78.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
at the same time, they are displayed in succes-
sion.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp comes on.
It is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Viewing more information later
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Check Control messages" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
To exit the display:
Select and press the controller.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
After the warning, you are only alerted to reach-
ing this speed a second time if your vehicle
speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or
5km/h.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Setting or changing the limit
1. Select speed value and press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the limit.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system adopts your current
speed as the limit.
Activating the limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is activated.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was
running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an interim time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation
in the background.<
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
The language of the Control Display can be set.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
until "Language" is selected and press the
controller.
5. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can switch to another language
for the display texts and navigation mes-
sages.
6. Select and activate the desired language by
pressing the controller.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Brightness" is selected and press the
controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator
warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. To measure the distance,
there are four ultrasonic sensors in the
bumpers.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec-
ond when you engage reverse gear. Wait this
short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches
off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds
> if you stop in front of an object that has been
detected by only one of the corner sensors
> if you are driving parallel to a wall.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc-
tioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
You can also have the system show distances
to objects on the Control Display. The contours
of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis-
play even before the acoustic signal sounds.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
82
until "PDC" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-
troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display is shown on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive
cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal
injury or property damage. Loud sound sources
outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC
signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously, oth-
erwise there is a risk of personal injury or prop-
erty damage.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 115.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assist
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC optimizes driving stability and traction. In
addition, the system recognizes unstable driv-
ing situations such as understeering and over-
steering, and helps keep the vehicle on a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
power and applying the brakes on individual
wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
M Dynamic Mode MDM*
M Dynamic Mode is a mode of the Dynamic
Stability Control DSC that permits greater lon-
gitudinal and lateral acceleration when driving
on dry surfaces, yet with reduced driving stabil-
ity. Only at the absolute limit of stability does
the system intervene to stabilize the vehicle by
reducing engine power and applying the brakes
on the wheels. In such situations, additional
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
corrective steering maneuvers may be neces-
sary.
M Dynamic Mode is switched off every time the
engine is restarted.
When the M Dynamic Mode is on, stabi-
lizing measures are performed to a limited
degree only. Take action yourself, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<
To maintain vehicle stability, drive with
the DSC activated and the
M Dynamic Mode deactivated whenever possi-
ble.<
Activating MDM
Press the button on the steering wheel, refer
to MDrive
*
on page 48. The MDM indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if you
previously selected the M Dynamic Mode MDM
in MDrive.
When the ignition is on, you can set the
M Dynamic Mode via MDrive on the Control
Display.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "M settings" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "MDrive" and press the controller.
5. Select "DSC" and press the controller.
6. Select "M Dynamic Mode" and press the
controller.
Deactivating MDM
Press the button on the steering wheel
again; the MDM indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp goes out briefly after
the engine is started.
If the indicator lamp lights up:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
The indicator lamp lights up perma-
nently and the DSC indicator lamp
flashes. M Dynamic Mode is control-
ling the drive and braking forces.
Deactivating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button for longer than
approx. 1 second; the indicator lamps for DSC
in the instrument cluster light up. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
You may find it useful to briefly deactivate DSC
under the following exceptional circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the DSC OFF button again; the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
84
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive and brak-
ing forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
Electronic Damper Control
EDC*
The concept
Whenever there is a change in any significant
parameter such as road surface quality or in an
operating condition such as steering, braking,
etc., the damping automatically adjusts to the
new conditions in fractions of a second.
You can select between three programs.
"Comfort" program
Select the "Comfort" program if you want com-
fort-oriented control of the shock absorbers.
"Normal" program
The "Normal" program offers control that is bal-
anced between comfort and sportiness.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want consis-
tently sporty control of the shock absorbers.
Selecting a program
Press the EDC button repeatedly:
> "Comfort": LED off:
> "Normal": one LED lights up.
> "Sport": both LEDs light up.
Each time the engine is started, the program set
for the remote control in use is active, refer to
Key-dependent settings on page 49.
You can also set and call up your preferred
program via MDrive, refer to page 48.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the
individual tires while moving.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum-
ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed
of the affected wheel. This change is detected
and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each
time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
System limitations
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains
are attached.<
Using the button in the center console
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until
the warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to Indi-
cation of a flat tire on page 86.
The message "Initializing FTM..." appears
on the Control Display for several seconds.
3. Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is
moving, without any feedback.
Via iDrive
For operating principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "FTM" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
9. Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is
moving, without any feedback.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
car. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify the damaged tire. To do so, check
the tire pressure using the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to Producing the tire inflation
pressure on page 227.
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to page 227.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on in yel-
low. A message appears on the Con-
trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has
a malfunction or has failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla-
tion pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth-
erwise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud-
den severe tire damage caused by out-
side influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi-
cated even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics has been
mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunction-
ing due to other systems or devices using the
same radio frequency.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the wheels represents the status of
the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures
change while the vehicle is being driven. The
tire pressures do not need to be corrected
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means
of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the
established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on
the Control Display.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in several tires. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems
or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
Using the button in the center console
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Press the button for approx. 4 seconds until
the warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up yellow. Warning lamp, refer to
Message for low tire inflation pressure on
page 88.
The message "Resetting TPM..." appears
on the Control Display for several seconds.
3. Start to drive.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the
target values to be monitored. The system
reset is completed during your drive, and
can be interrupted at any time. When driving
resumes, the reset is continued automati-
cally. The indicator lamp goes out after the
system reset is completed.
Via iDrive
For operating principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "TPM" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The wheels are shown in gray and "Reset-
ting TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The system reset is
completed during your drive, and can be inter-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the
reset is continued automatically. On the Control
Display, the wheels are shown in green and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting and determining the inflation
pressures, all wheels on the Control Display are
displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is
shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-
tial loss of tire pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
car. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden-
tify the damaged wheel on the vehicle.
3. Repair the flat tire with the M Mobility Sys-
tem, refer to page 226.
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop that is informed in the handling of
TPM and that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the larger warning lamp comes
on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the wheels are shown in gray and a message
appears. No punctures can be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following
situations:
> If there is a malfunction
Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has
been mounted
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same
radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. The system is not reset after a
tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 87.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Servotronic
The concept
"Servotronic" varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
At low speeds, steering is assisted strongly, i.e.
less effort is required to turn the vehicle. Steer-
ing assistance lessens with increasing speed.
You can select between two programs
*
.
"Normal" program
Select the "Normal" program if you want com-
fort-oriented steering, e.g. in city traffic or when
parking.
"Sport" program
Select the "Sport" program if you want consis-
tently sporty steering.
Selecting a program
You can set and call up your preferred pro-
gram via MDrive, refer to page 48.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 40 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attach
seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe-
cifically approved for seats with integral side air-
bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of
clothing such as coats or jackets over the back-
rests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag
retention system from the vehicle. Do not mod-
ify the individual components of the system or
its wiring in any way. This includes the uphol-
stered covers on the steering wheel, instrument
panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides
of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or
dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 51.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accor-
dance with whether and how the front passen-
ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows
whether the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child-restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi-
cle production. After mounting a child seat,
ensure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the
front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as
long as a person of sufficient size and in a
correct sitting position is detected on the
seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 54, the
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Lamps
92
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*
, daytime run-
ning lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive
Head Light
*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
When the ignition is switched off and the switch
is in position 1, only the outside sections of the
rear lamps are illuminated, refer to page 225.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 94.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap-
tive Head Light
*
is active. The LED next to the
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are
on. You can also activate the daytime running
lamps, refer to page 93. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lamps to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-
troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after park-
ing the car, with the lamps switched off, the low
beams and the rear lamps come on and remain
on for a certain time.
You can adjust the operating period or deacti-
vate the function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the corre-
sponding duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps
The daytime running lamps light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Lamps
94
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 92.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front pas-
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are active and switched on on
both sides.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the brightness level and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps
*
, entry
lamps
*
, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps
*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps
are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 54.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear
*
:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps
*
, entry lamps
*
and courtesy lamps
*
per-
manently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear
*
,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Climate
96
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 99
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of
passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/
Recirculated-air mode
10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side
of passenger compartment
11 Residual heat
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window defroster
15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display, refer to page 97.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 28.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment
is deactivated.
You can switch the automatic air distribution
back on by pressing the AUTO button. This
automatically switches on the cooling function
as well.
Fine adjustments to manual air
distribution
You can set the rate of incoming airflow for
manual air distribution.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the desired field.
5. Turn the controller to set the air distribution.
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to the footwell
Temperature
Set the desired temperatures indi-
vidually for the driver's and front
passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
When you switch between different tem-
perature settings in quick succession, the
automatic climate control does not have
enough time to achieve the set temperature.<
You can achieve maximum heating power with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Climate
98
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above
32 7/0 6 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recir-
culated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air
flow rate and your temperature specifications
will be adapted to outside influences as a result
of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window
condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the
intensity of the AUTO program. The current
setting is briefly displayed on the Control Dis-
play every time the button is pressed.
You can also set the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram via iDrive.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto-
matic program is switched on.
Adjusting air flow rate manually
Press the left side of the button to
reduce airflow. Press the right side
of the button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode for the
air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the
left side of the button to switch off the auto-
matic climate control. All displays are cleared
except for the rear window defroster if it is
switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window
defroster to reactivate the automatic climate
control.
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating
mode by pressing this button
repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-
essary, the system blocks the supply of out-
side air and recirculates the inside air. As
soon as the concentration of pollutants in
the outside air has decreased sufficiently,
the system automatically switches back to
outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
continuously for lengthy periods, otherwise the
quality of the air inside the car will gradually
deteriorate.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated-air mode and the previous mode using an
individually programmable button
on the steer-
ing wheel, refer to page 47.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off
> While the engine is at operating tempera-
ture
> As long as battery voltage is sufficient
> At an outside temperature below 77 7/
25 6
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior
temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-
bution.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Switching cooling function on/off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting. This
function is only available while the engine is
running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna
and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance if it has become
too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Climate
100
Ventilation in the rear
1 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temper-
ature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary.
It is ready for use at any outside temperature
during parked car operation.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times
can be preselected. The system can also be
switched on and off directly.
Due to its high power consumption, it should
not be switched on twice in a row without driv-
ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is selected.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating switch-on times
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con-
troller.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The parked car ventilation is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
102
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 103.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Com-
ply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched off.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If
it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap-
idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
104
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4 mph or 7 km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Roller sun blinds*
Rear window blind
Tap the button in the center console to raise or
lower the roller sun blind.
Roller sun blinds for rear side windows
Pull loop of roller sun blind and hook onto
bracket.
Do not open the window when the roller
sun blind has been pulled up, otherwise
there is a risk of damage at high speeds that
may result in personal injury.<
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold cover up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
106
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 28.
LED hand lamp
In a holder on the left side of the glove compart-
ment.
Insert the hand lamp into the holder with
the lens pointing toward the passenger
compartment to ensure that the lamp cannot be
switched on accidentally.<
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter
*
, depending on the equip-
ment version. For more information about this
mobile phone base plate refer to the separate
Owner's Manual.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Ventilated storage compartment
The storage compartment in the center armrest
can be ventilated: slide the switch backwards.
The temperature is controlled via the knurled
wheel for adjusting the temperature of air venti-
lating the rear of the passenger compartment,
refer to page 100.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-In port, refer to page 171
> USB-audio interface
*
, refer to page 172
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find compartments beside the steering col-
umn
*
, in the front doors and in the center con-
sole
*
.
There are nets
*
on the front-seat backrests.
Clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in
the rear passenger compartment.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other-
wise they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cup holders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages,
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cup holders, oth-
erwise damage could result.<
Front
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cup holder.
Rear*
There are two additional cup holders in the rear
center armrest.
Press the front of the armrest.
Ashtray, front
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
108
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Ashtray, rear
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets
is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape
or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 106.
Sockets in the rear center console*
Remove corresponding cover.
Socket in the cargo bay*
Open the cap.
Through-loading system*
Opening
1. Open the belt lock of the rear center safety
belt. To do so, press the red button in the
belt lock 2 using the latch plate 1.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go, refer to page 42.
4. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to its upright
position and engage it.
When returning the backrest into its
seating position, make sure that the
seat's locking mechanism engages prop-
erly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown
around in the event of sharp braking or
swerving and endanger the occupants.<
2. Release the latch plate from the fixture on
the rear window shelf and insert it into the
belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure
you hear the latch plate engage in the belt
buckle.
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo bay nets
*
or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 117.
Storage compartments inside
the cargo bay
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack-
ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver-
sion
> Net
*
for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo bay
> Drawer for storing small items. Pull the han-
dle firmly to release the drawer. If neces-
sary, you can pull out the drawer entirely,
refer to the information below
Do not drive or close the luggage com-
partment lid while the drawer is pulled
out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
On uphill gradients, release the drawer with
caution, otherwise it could slide out on its own
and cause injury.
Do not exceed a maximum load of 11 lbs/5 kg
for the drawer, otherwise damage could
result.<
Removing the drawer
1. Push the drawer all the way in.
2. Turn the catches on the left and right all the
way out.
3. Remove the drawer by pulling it down and
backwards.
Reinserting the drawer
1. Hook the guides of the drawer into the front
of the yellow guide aids on the bottom of the
cargo bay.
2. Insert the catches into the mounts on the
bottom of the cargo bay.
3. Turn the catches on the left and right all the
way in.
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-
partment under the floor panel, otherwise dam-
age could result.<
Press the floor panel against the ceiling of the
cargo bay; a locking device holds the floor panel
in place. To detach the floor panel, pull it out of
the locking device.
With drawer:
Take the retaining strap on the right-hand side
of the drawer out of the bracket and use it to fix
the floor panel in place.
Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 117.
Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/
2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag's retain-
ing strap in the center belt buckle.
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
114
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 5,500 rpm or a
road speed of 105 mph/170 km/h.
Do not depress the accelerator all the way.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,000 miles/5,000 km
Engine and road speeds can be increased grad-
ually up to a traveling speed of 135 mph/
220 km/h. Use the maximum speed only for
brief intervals, e.g. when passing.
Transmission
The transmission begins functioning at an opti-
mal level only after a distance of approx.
300 miles/500 km. Do not exceed engine
speeds of 5,500 rpm during this period.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Clearance
Mind the limited clearance of the BMW
M3, e.g. when driving into underground
parking garages or over obstacles. If equipped
with EDC
*
, select the "Sport" program, refer to
page 84, when driving off curbs to keep clear-
ance as even as possible. Otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged.<
Close the luggage compartment lid
Operate the vehicle only when the lug-
gage compartment lid is closed. Other-
wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of
the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage
compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto-
matic climate control system, refer to
page 98.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
115
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ing, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes, e.g.
when loading the cargo bay, otherwise there is a
risk of burn injuries.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 209.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch
wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 84.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system.
M dual clutch transmission: never drive
with the transmission in neutral or with
the engine switched off; otherwise, engine
braking action will not be present or there will be
no power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu-
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
engine braking action will not be present or
there will be no power assistance to the brakes
or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals, otherwise pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
116
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
This can also lead to a permanent loss in ride
comfort and to squealing noises during braking.
A loss in comfort can also be caused by
extended braking with little pressure on the
pedal.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
For information on brake system technology,
refer to Compound brake on page 119.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. This can ultimately
result in a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
bay, as this could result in damage to the vehi-
cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
117
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-
gage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo bay net
*
or draw
straps
*
.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are
provided for attaching the cargo straps.
Two are located on the cargo bay
sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo
bay panel 2.
Please comply with the information sup-
plied with the cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 240, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 52, otherwise these could be damaged.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A luggage rack mounted on the roof
changes vehicle aerodynamics and han-
dling. Exercise restraint when driving with a
roof-mounted luggage rack to avoid the risk of
an accident.<
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
118
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 240.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for rais-
ing the glass roof, and that objects do not
project into the opening path of the luggage
compartment lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
119
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
BMW M3 engineering
High performance V8 engine
The high-revving V8 engine draws a maximum
power of 420 hp/309 kW and a peak torque of
295 lb ft/400 Nm from a displacement of
244 cu in/4 liters. Its spontaneous response
results in a very wide effective rpm range. The
maximum engine speed lies at 8,400 rpm and is
electronically controlled. Due to the high engine
dynamics, the maximum engine speed is lim-
ited to 7,000 rpm when the vehicle is standing.
Warming up the engine
During the warm-up phase, the high-perfor-
mance V8 engine runs a little more roughly due
to its emissions control system.
For technical reasons, the exhaust system
sounds slightly metallic when the engine is
cold.
For further information on warming up the
engine, refer to Tachometer on page 67 and
Engine oil temperature on page 68.
Compound brake
Your BMW M3 is equipped with a high-perfor-
mance brake system with perforated com-
pound brake discs.
Due to special design features of the perforated
compound brake discs, operating noise is audi-
ble during braking. However, this does not
affect the brake's performance, safe operation
or stability under load.
Braking correctly
To keep the brake system in optimal condition,
it is advisable to apply the brakes at regular
intervals as appropriate for the character of the
vehicle.
Refer also to Corrosion on brake rotors on
page 115.
Drive train
In your BMW M3, special emphasis was placed
on the direct connection between the engine
and drive. The torsionally rigid execution of the
drive train results in acoustic feedback of the
torque, as is typical in sports cars. Clacking
sounds can arise during load changes. They do
not impair functionality or shorten the lifespan
of any component.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW M3 engineering
120
Driving on a race track
BMW recommends the following measures
before driving on a race track:
> Participate in a BMW driver training course
> Have the vehicle checked by your BMW
center
Operation on a race track can lead to
increased wear. The BMW M3 is not
designed for use in competitive motorsports.
This wear is not covered by the vehicle war-
ranty.<
The series brake pads and wear indicator are
not designed for operation on a race track. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Starting the navigation system
124
Starting the navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at
your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up.
The navigation DVD is pulled in automati-
cally.
2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con-
tents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be
blocked. In this case, a message will appear on
the Control Display.
Display in the assistance
window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another applica-
tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
4. Press the controller.
Showing arrow display in map view*
When the navigation system suggests a change
in direction, the arrow display appears briefly.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions"
and press the controller.
The arrow view is displayed in the assis-
tance window.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
126
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 130
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 132
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 133
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 134
> Selecting home address, refer to page 136
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 139.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and
other road users may be endangered.<
Opening navigation
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
The following is displayed on the Control Dis-
play:
> The arrow or map view during destination
guidance
> The destination list when destination guid-
ance is switched off
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 138. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the country dis-
played and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on
the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
At least the town/city of the destination or its zip
code must be entered in order to start the des-
tination guidance.
Entering destination by town/city name
1. Select "Town / City" or the town/city dis-
played and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press the con-
troller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller towards the right to
select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select , and press the controller for
a longer period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
4. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the third field from the top. Turn the control-
ler until the city or town name is selected
from the list and press the controller.
Entering destination by zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
> To enter spaces:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller towards the right to
select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select , and press the controller for
a longer period.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
destination is selected and press the con-
troller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in the same manner as
the town or city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering a
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same
name in the designated country are offered.
The corresponding town/city is displayed after
the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
negate this entry. This could be helpful in
instances where the desired street does not
exist in the entered town/city because it
belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until you see
a request to enter a street in the country,
then press the controller.
3. Switch to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored for the
street on the navigation DVD.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. To enter the house number:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
3. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
house number is selected and press the
controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If you do not want to start destination guid-
ance right away:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 133.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice command system. During the destination
input, you can switch between voice entry and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice command system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Options}.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice command system.
Entering a destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling the destination
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is
commonly spelled in the destination country.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina-
tions that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries
at a time appear on the Control Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*
The names of towns/cities and streets located
in the region in which the language of the voice
command system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire
word, the system language must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and
avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the destination coun-
try.
1. To spell the name of a town/city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city. The more letters you say, the
more accurately the system will recog-
nize the town/city.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries in the list:
{Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city
of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina-
tions that fit your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a des-
tination followed by three dots.
If applicable, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination town/city.
To enter the house number:
House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered.
Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
Destinations are added to the destination list or
can be stored in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of destination, you can enter the destina-
tion using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to
select the destination on the map and then
transfer it for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city.
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To re-enter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To move the map: move the controller in
the desired direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forwards and backwards.
5. Press the controller to transfer the destina-
tion for destination guidance or to store it.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places your
current position at the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination at the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for destination entry can also be called
up in the map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using
information
You can have a list of selected destinations dis-
played, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and
transfer them for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from your location.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
Destinations are shown on the Control Dis-
play.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of information and sym-
bols depends on the particular navi-
gation DVD you are using.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destina-
tion list and start destination guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in the map display
If you select the hotel category, for example,
and start a search, hotels appear on the map as
symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map display:
1. Select the symbol and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con-
troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the sys-
tem are shown in the destination list. You can
call up these destinations and transfer them for
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
destination guidance.
If you are planning a longer journey, for exam-
ple, you can store all the destinations you wish
to drive to in the destination list in advance,
refer to Entering a destination manually on
page 126.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The destination last entered is listed first in the
destination list.
This symbol identifies the current destina-
tion during destination guidance.
To show other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn the controller.
Transferring destination for
destination guidance
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> To store the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> To display information on the destina-
tion:
Select "Information on destination".
> To delete the entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination
guidance is switched off.
> To change an entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination by town/city name,
page 127.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter the name and address, refer also to
Entering a destination manually, page 126.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, refer to
page 133.
Storing current position*
The current position can be transferred to the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
address" is selected and press the control-
ler.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 126.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position into the
address book if you have left the area covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 126.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Delete data" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
Storing home address
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Home address" is selected and press the
controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address" or
"Save current destination" during destina-
tion guidance and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Using home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 126.
Route selection
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As
a result, the routes recommended by the navi-
gation system may not always be the same
ones that you would choose based on personal
experience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route preference" is selected and press
the controller.
The various criteria are shown on the Con-
trol Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Highways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Highways are avoided as far as possible.
> "Fast route"
Fast route, being a combination of the
shortest possible route and the fastest
roads
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
Automatic rerouting due to traffic
obstructions. Depending on road type
and the kind and extent of the traffic
obstruction, the guided route may lead
through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
138
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com-
paring your destination entries with the data
stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for
instant response. The benefits for you include:
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored on
the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of errone-
ous or unregistered names is impossible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
controller.
2. Select the destination from the destination
list and press the controller or enter a new
destination, refer to page 126.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
Destination guidance can also be started in the
arrow or map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment items at any time via iDrive.
You will be notified in time of any necessary
change of direction by means of spoken
instructions and the display of the direction
arrows.
Via programmable memory keys
... Press the key on which the
desired destination has been stored, refer also
to page 21.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In the arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In the destination list
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con-
troller.
If you did not reach the destination before the
end of the last journey, the following question
will appear in the display at the start of the next
journey:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Route display
You can have the route during destination guid-
ance displayed in various ways.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 18.<
Arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Arrow display" is selected and press the
controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Selecting route criteria
3 Starting/stopping destination guidance
4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current location
7 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route
> Solid arrow:
Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal-
culated route whenever the vehicle is
not in an area recorded on the navigation
DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the top or bottom line
of the Control Display.
The arrows change appearance before a
change of direction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Map display
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
desired map display is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be shown/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination using infor-
mation, page 132
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information
*
manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the bottom line of the
Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
can have the map shown facing north or toward
your current direction of travel, or in perspec-
tive. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater,
the map is always north-oriented.
Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map display is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
Displaying towns/cities and streets
along the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled within
each section of the route are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route list" is selected and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Repeating or canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel, you can also execute the following func-
tions, refer to page 16:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button for a longer period.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Changing a route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
route" is selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation relevant to the route you are planning to
take is automatically shown and, if desired,
taken into account in route planning. Whether
destination guidance is active or not, you can
have the traffic information displayed in the map
view or in the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the best reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Calling up traffic information manually
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information
can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf-
fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, traffic information
items along the planned route are indicated by
yellow diamonds.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
Displaying traffic information in map
display
The traffic information icons are shown in the
map display up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
The highlighting of the stretch corresponding
to the traffic report and the icons for the type of
event as described below are displayed and
hidden. This depends on the selected scale.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
146
Traffic information icons
Traffic information during destination
guidance
In the event of a traffic obstruction on the
planned route, the traffic information icons are
shown with a red border.
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected,
refer to page 137.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is
not selected, you are shown certain informa-
tion, such as the length of the traffic congestion,
when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
Traffic event displayed with map
scales larger than 5 miles/10 km;
arrow points in relevant direction of
travel.
There are several traffic events.
Switch to a smaller map scale to
show more detail.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriageway
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic backup
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop and go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic events in both directions of
travel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Select "Detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system calculates a new route
to avoid the congestion.
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route
will be changed automatically in the event of a
traffic obstruction. The system does not point
out traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on road type and the kind and extent
of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route
may lead through the traffic obstruction.
Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is
switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until "Cur-
rent position" is selected and press the
controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 141.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
What to do if …
148
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-
tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-
trol Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This infor-
mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your current position is not
yet available on your navigation DVD, or the
system is in the process of calculating your
current position. As a rule, reception is
guaranteed when you are in the open.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a
destination as close as possible to the orig-
inal one.
> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guid-
ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Choose a destination
as close as possible to the original one.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
On/off and settings
152
On/off and settings
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
Buttons on the CD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD.
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD
changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVD
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "SAT": satellite radio
*
> "CD": CD player or changer
*
> "AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
*
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 18.<
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
In order to switch the entertainment sound out-
put on and off:
Press button 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired
volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected if you
have called up "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", pressing the
controller after each selection.
Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
driving speed. You can set various stages for
the increase in volume.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
On/off and settings
154
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To switch off the spatial sound effect:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Individual High-End Audio System*
You can choose between stereo and multichan-
nel playback, surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Reset" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. In vehicles equipped with two drives:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Radio
156
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to the radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-
sets".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM
waveband or if the displayed stations are no
longer receivable, update the stations with the
best reception, refer to page 157.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The system switches to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change the station with the but-
tons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations"
*
:
Stations that can currently be received on
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
Stations with the best reception on the
"AM" waveband.
For High Definition Radio: stations with the
best reception on the "FM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 158.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addi-
tion to those already being displayed, refer
to Selecting the frequency manually,
page 157.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To change the selection criterion:
1. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
2. Choose a selection criterion and press the
controller.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations on the current waveband are auto-
matically sampled in succession.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Station sampling is interrupted and the
selected station stays on.
Buttons on the CD player
To sample stations, press the but-
ton for the corresponding direction for an
extended time.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting the frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that can
be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals in the AM
waveband.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Radio
158
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top. Turn the controller until
the desired selection criterion is chosen
and press the controller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer also to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired key for a
longer period.
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
The number of the memory location
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
Radio Data System RDS
On the FM waveband, additional information is
broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names will appear in the dis-
play.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit analog and digital sig-
nals. You can receive these stations digitally for
improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available to be
able to receive digital stations.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
Digital station reception is now switched on.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Radio
160
Some stations do not transmit the digital and
analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an
area in which digital reception of the selected
station is not possible continuously, reception
will alternate between analog and digital. This
can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this
case it may be preferable to switch off digital
reception.
Selecting the programs of a digital
station*
Some stations broadcast several programs on a
single frequency. To select one of these pro-
grams:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that can be received digi-
tally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is received digitally.
4. Change to the next program of
the digital station using the buttons on the
radio or steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 158.
Updating digitally receivable stations
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the digitally receivable stations is
updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Displaying additional information
With digital stations, additional information on
the current track can be displayed, e.g. the
name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Select the station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
When you change to another digitally received
station, any additional information is displayed
after a brief interruption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
162
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have the corresponding pack-
ages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses
can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required for disabling.<
3. To disable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting and storing a
channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels and categories are displayed on
the Control Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you stored previ-
ously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Details" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
164
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing a channel
1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channels with buttons on CD
player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The system switches to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal
is received, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depend-
ing on environmental or topographic con-
ditions, it may not be possible to receive any
signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this.
A signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to high-rise build-
ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other
strong sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig-
nal becomes available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be
played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting the CD player
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up.
The CD is pulled in automatically. Playback
starts automatically if the sound output is on.
When playing CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to
read in the data, depending on the directory
structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. On cars with a
CD changer, select "CD" and press the
controller to start the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the CD player function on the
programmable memory keys to start the CD
player, refer to page 21.
Starting the CD changer
Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to
page 169.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
166
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select the
desired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is
selected and played.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-
zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on the programmable memory keys to
start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Turn the controller to select a track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press
the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the car is equipped with two CD drives, you
can save specific tracks on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 21.
Displaying information about the
track*
With compressed audio files, any information
about the current track that has been recorded
can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically
sampled once in succession.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected
track is played on.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Scan directory" and
press the controller.
> To sample all the tracks on the CD,
select "Scan all" and press the control-
ler.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track
is retained.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
168
Repeating tracks
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Repeat directory" and
press the controller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all the tracks in the current direc-
tory in random order, select "Random
directory" and press the controller.
> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran-
dom order, select "Random all" and
press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is
distorted.
CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo bay.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on
top.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired drawer, see arrow, and
remove the CD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
170
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damage prevention
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as
needed by wiping it with a commercially avail-
able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the
center of the disc outwards.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
AUX-In port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-in port.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "AUX" function on the pro-
grammable memory keys to start audio play-
back, refer to page 21.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
172
USB-audio interface
You can connect audio devices, e.g. an iPod or
a USB device (MP3 player, USB stick), to the
USB-audio interface. They can be operated via
iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.
Due the variety of audio devices on the market,
it cannot be guaranteed that every device will
be operable on the vehicle.
Ask your BMW center about what audio devices
are suitable.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Depending on your vehicle's equipment
version, it may contain a storage pouch
for your audio device. The pouch is located
under the center armrest.<
iPod
To connect the iPod use the BMW cable
adapter for Apple iPod. For more information,
contact your BMW center or go to the Internet:
www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the iPod to ports 1
and 2.
The iPod's menu structure is supported by the
USB-audio interface.
USB device
To connect the device, use the included
flexible adapter cable to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the USB device to
port 2.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using
the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using
the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices or for
about 20,000 tracks can be stored on the vehi-
cle.
If a fifth USB device is connected and if more
than 20,000 tracks are to be stored, the infor-
mation on existing tracks may be lost.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, the name
is displayed.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio
device and press the controller.
Playback begins with the first track.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "USB" function on the pro-
grammable memory keys to start audio play-
back, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks using the playlists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up tracks using the file directory. The tracks
can be displayed if they have been stored in the
Latin alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-
ists", and press the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the track
Any information about the current track that has
been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
174
Repeating tracks
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random play:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which
could compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The USB-audio interface acts as the power
supply to the connected audio devices, pro-
vided that this is supported by the audio
device. Therefore, do not connect the USB
audio device to the power socket in the
vehicle during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to
charge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and BMW
TeleServices.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
178
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. You can
store the pairing data for up to four mobile
phones simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected at the same time, the
mobile phone last paired can be operated via
the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside
the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures
better network reception and consistent repro-
duction quality. Please contact your
BMW center to find out for which mobile
phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed
description of safety precautions and informa-
tion, we request that you direct your particular
attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported
by the mobile phone preparation package and
which mobile phones are compatible with the
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular
software versions, these mobile phones sup-
port the functions described in this Owner's
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other
mobile phones.
Care instructions
Important information on this subject can be
found in the separate mobile phone Owner's
Manual.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
*
using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> iDrive, refer to page 183
> Voice commands, refer to page 189
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-
erwise malfunctions may result.
Making phone calls with the
BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist
calls
You can use the BMW Assist System via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-
tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist or
while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the
vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the full preparation
package mobile phone. You can obtain
information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 183, and in the mobile
phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone, some
default settings may be necessary for the
mobile phone: e.g. using the following
menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection without confirmation
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
> For pairing purposes, define any number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required after
pairing has been successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle
only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition
1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
180
7. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con-
troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control-
ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation via the mobile phone
10. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also
appears on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see
messages, first on the mobile phone display or
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey previously determined by
you.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, you will
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and the Control Display.
13. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and
press the controller.
14. Wait several seconds until the "Communi-
cation" menu is displayed.
The next time you use the mobile phone inside
the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more
than 2 minutes as long as the engine is running
or the ignition is switched on.
With some mobile phones it may be nec-
essary to make certain settings for a per-
manent Bluetooth link, e.g. using the authoriza-
tion or secure connection menu item, refer to
your mobile phone's operating instructions.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends
on your mobile phone and can take several min-
utes; please refer to your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one
after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired,
the pairing data for the mobile phone whose
pairing data was first stored on the vehicle is
deleted.
Checks to perform if pairing is
unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You
can obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? The same Blue-
tooth passkey must be entered on the
mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected with the mobile phone. If neces-
sary, delete connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and on or
briefly disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con-
troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing fails again, contact BMW Customer
Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations:
Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number for BMW Customer Rela-
tions and information necessary for pairing
appear on the display. In mobile phones that are
already connected, you can select the BMW
Customer Relations phone number to place the
call.
List of paired mobile phones
Mobile phones with pairing data stored by the
vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile
phones are detected by the vehicle at the same
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
182
time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can
be operated via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this
list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile
phones via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone moves up one posi-
tion on the list.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
Should you no longer wish to operate a mobile
phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile
phone's pairing data.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the
list.
The phone book entries and the lists of stored
phone numbers are deleted as well.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth
link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not
permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac-
tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle
and the mobile phone, if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle,
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface
can be used in combination with the mobile
phone, e.g. a laptop.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Settings" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions using
iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> Dialing phone numbers
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone
book
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
184
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Voice quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficul-
ties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The full mobile
phone preparation package can compensate
for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or by pointing the
open front air vents downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem
Requirements
> The mobile phone's pairing data are stored
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper-
ational.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the
vehicle.
Calling up communication
Many of the functions described below are con-
trolled using the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to call up
"Communication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by select-
ing the digits individually and pressing the
controller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the numbers on
the keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller towards the right to
select the arrow and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Alternatively: press the button on the
steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store phone numbers on the program-
mable memory keys to call these numbers
directly, refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
2. "End call" is selected.
Press the controller.
Selecting a phone number from the
phone book or from a list of stored
phone numbers
Phone numbers you have dialed, received calls
and phone book entries are stored in lists when
the mobile phone is linked to the vehicle via
Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone
book, the name of the entry is displayed instead
of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries in your mobile phone's phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
186
book, consisting of names and phone num-
bers, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers dialed most frequently
from the "A - Z" phone book are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
rejected calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
Selecting phone numbers from phone
book
The "A - Z" list is available for your phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the initial letter of the desired entry
and press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing a stored phone number from a
list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select a list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting an individual entry
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting the entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you,
you can have several service numbers dis-
played:
> BMW Roadside Assistance
*
if you need
help in the event of a breakdown
> BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser-
vice appointment, for example
> BMW Customer Relations
*
for information
related to your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 193.
You can dial the displayed service numbers if
your mobile phone has been paired with the
vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
188
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact will be established.
Dialing phone numbers via touch tones
Touch-tone dialing is required for access to
network services or for controlling devices, e.g.
for remote querying on an answering machine.
This function is available whenever there is a
connection.
1. Establish connection.
2. Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired touch-tone character
and press the controller.
Each selection is transmitted immediately
and is confirmed by a tone, depending on
the type of mobile phone you are using.
Switching between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free
system as long as the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on. Depending on your
mobile phone, the system automatically
switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically
switch to hands-free mode:
> Depending on the type of mobile phone you
are using, it may be possible to continue the
conversation via the hands-free system.
Refer to the display on your mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
and/or your mobile phone's operating
instructions.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free sys-
tem, it may be possible to continue the call via
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile
phone model. Refer to the display on your
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link.
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may occur that calls are switched from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if
reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice
commands*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to take a hand off the steering wheel.
During your entries, you will be guided in many
cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation
via iDrive, refer to page 183.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating the system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say
commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system recognizes specific commands
that must be pronounced exactly word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{...}Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
190
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
The phone book entries can be called up auto-
matically from your mobile phone's memory.
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Command Voice control response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at
normal volume, avoiding excessive empha-
ses and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Inserting/removing snap-in
adapter*
1. Press area 1 around the button and take off
the cover
*
.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press area 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector
so that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical con-
tact points and press it downward until it
engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-
ing is unlocked.
To conserve battery power, you should
avoid using the mobile phone when the
ignition is switched off.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
192
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an Emergency Request
*
has been sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the
BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the
BMW Assist Response Center without you hav-
ing to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist
system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist
service will be available. The BMW Assist sys-
tem can be reactivated by a BMW center after a
new contract has been signed.
Requirements
You can use BMW Assist when the following
requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with
your BMW center or with the BMW Assist
Response Center. Enabling must have
been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 198.
Offered services
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
> Emergency Request, refer to page 230:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
> Automatic Collision Notification:
Under certain conditions, a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center after a serious accident. If possible,
the BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance:
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance
*
should you require help in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations:
For all information related to your vehicle
you can be connected with BMW Customer
Relations.
> BMW TeleServices
*
:
Data on your vehicle's service status or
required inspections are transmitted to your
BMW center either automatically before a
service due date or when you request a
BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock:
Contact the BMW Assist Response Center
if your remote control or key is not available
and you would like to have the vehicle
unlocked.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery:
After you report your vehicle stolen with the
police, call the BMW Assist Response Cen-
ter to determine its position.
In addition, optional services can be provided to
you, such as the Concierge service or informa-
tion on directions, traffic or the weather. You
can use Critical Calling to activate a limited
number of calls via the BMW Assist Response
Center, e.g. when you do not have your mobile
phone with you.
Press the SOS button in order to contact the
BMW Assist Response Center, see below.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
194
You can also access the BMW Assist Concierge
service via the Internet.
Characteristics of the offered services
The following characteristics apply to the ser-
vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can be vehicle data,
for example, your current position or the
Condition Based Service CBS data.
Using services
Contacting the BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
The arrangement of the switches and indi-
cator lamps varies slightly among vehicle
equipment versions.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Roadside Assistance
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the current location can be determined,
the current vehicle position is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW TeleServices*
Automatic BMW Teleservice Call*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on required inspections are transmitted auto-
matically prior to the due date. You can check
when the BMW center was notified.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con-
troller.
Manual BMW Teleservice Call
You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's
service status to your BMW center when you
wish to arrange a service appointment.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Service Request" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
196
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The service-relevant data are transmitted. Your
BMW center will contact you to arrange a ser-
vice appointment.
Displaying and updating* BMW
TeleServices
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Enabled TeleServices" and press
the controller.
The activated BMW TeleServices are dis-
played.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For all information related to your vehicle you
can call BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Customer Relations.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
197
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, e.g., current
events, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive
the corresponding telephone numbers and
addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly
through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
Concierge service requires additional enabling
by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling the Concierge
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with a BMW Assist Concierge.
Displaying transmitted data
Select a received message, if applicable, and
press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring
an address for destination guidance
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> Press "Call" to make a telephone call. A pre-
requisite for this is that your Bluetooth
mobile phone has been paired with the
vehicle.
> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the
address to the navigation system for desti-
nation guidance.
Adapting BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
If the services offered by BMW Assist change,
you will be notified. In that event you may
update the service functions.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
198
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Enabled Assist services" is selected
and press the controller.
The currently available BMW Assist ser-
vices are displayed.
6. If necessary, select "Options" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Activating BMW Assist
BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser-
vices.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current location. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during
the activation process.
Activating
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
199
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
until "Enabled Assist services" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
BMW Assist is activated and data exchange
with the BMW Assist Response Center
begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. Progress status
is displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is enabled, you can have the
system display the Telematics ID. The
Telematics ID identifies your vehicle. These
data are transmitted to your BMW center.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
200
until "Assist profile" is selected and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
roadside assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Refueling
204
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press
the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler door manually:
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo bay.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.6 US gal/63 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 3.3 US gal/12.5 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications
Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this
would cause permanent damage to the
catalytic converter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 93
Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain
maximum fuel economy and performance.
The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8 Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
206
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive on
a flat tire. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 85, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 86.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The table below provides all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following page in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100mph or 160km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's-side door post when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following page in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
235/40 R 18 M+S 33/230 39/270 33/230 36/250 38/260 46/320
Front: 245/40 ZR 18 33/230 - 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 265/40 ZR 18 - 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 245/35 ZR 19 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280 -
Rear: 265/35 ZR 19 - 36/250 - 35/240 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 240.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
208
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Z = over 150 mph/240 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 0708 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 7 of 2008.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
235/40 R
18
100 V
245/35 ZR
19
e.g.
Manufacturer's code
for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 4607
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazard and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
210
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. When selecting tires, also take their load
capacity into account. If non-approved wheels
and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their
suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their
driving safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect
a puncture, refer to page 86. Your BMW center
will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. With standard-equipment tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
and other mixed tire sizes, swapping wheels
between the axles is not permissible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac-
turer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Ensure that the snow chains are sufficiently
tensioned at all times. If necessary, retension as
specified by the snow chain manufacturer.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Maintenance
212
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte-
nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 72:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 76; otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the
left, on the bottom of the instrument panel
underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamp lights up:
The exhaust emission values have
worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the
warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a
device for recording or sending certain vehicle
data or information. In addition, if you have
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or
recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding
services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Care
214
Care
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi-
cantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material tested, laboratory checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro-
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 239.
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 45.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Deactivate the rain sensor
*
to avoid unin-
tentional activation of the wipers.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g.
spoiler or telephone antennas, if there is a
possibility that they could be damaged.
M dual clutch transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control, even with conve-
nient access, into the ignition lock.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets / high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain a suffi-
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc-
tions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray against the sensors and cam-
eras, e.g. Park Distance Control, for an
extended period and maintain a distance of at
least 12 in/30 cm.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Washing the car manually
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces-
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash-
ing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Remove contamination, such as insects, by
soaking with shampoo or insect remover and
then rinsing with plenty of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield de-icer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
avoid streaking.
Wax and preservative residue and con-
tamination on the window can lead to
streaking when operating the windshield wip-
ers, leading to premature wear of the wiper
blades and causing the rain sensor to malfunc-
tion.<
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove very aggressive sub-
stances, e.g. spilled fuel, oil, grease, tree resin
or bird droppings, to prevent damage to the
paintwork.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair work-
shop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off of the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres-
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care prod-
ucts on rubber seals, otherwise noise and
damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts, such as the radia-
tor grill, door handles or window frames, with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive. For additional treatment, use a chrome
polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-
free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets over 1407/606, otherwise dam-
age may occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Care
216
Outside sensors / cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance
Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they
remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery / cloth trim
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To treat severe stains, e.g. from beverages, use
a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in
combination with suitable interior cleaners. Fol-
low the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Leather / leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre-
quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
In particular, ensure that light-colored leather is
cleaned regularly as it has a tendency to soil
more easily.
Treat the leather twice a year using a leather
lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the
leather's protective layer.
Carpets / cargo bay
You can vacuum the carpets and floor mats or
clean them with interior cleaner if heavily soiled.
The floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
When replacing the mats, ensure that the seat
rails do not extend over the floor mats, as this
may damage the mats.
Lint on the floor mats occurs for technical rea-
sons and can be removed by vacuuming
repeatedly.
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matt parts
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Do not clean with cleaning agents as
these may destroy the fabric.<
Interior sensors / cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of
the High-Beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth
moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean the displays, e.g. of the radio or instru-
ment cluster, use a display cleaning cloth or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays, otherwise damage
may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam-
age parts of the drive.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for
longer than three months, your BMW center or
a workshop that operates according to BMW
specifications will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
218
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment. Do
not open the engine hood before the engine has
cooled down, otherwise injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 20 in/
50 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 222
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 65
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 231
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
The oil level can be displayed when the engine
is warm. Continuous short distance travel or a
very sporty driving style may make measure-
ment impossible.
Display in the instrument cluster
1 Oil level
2 Maximum mark
3 Minimum mark
4 Computer button
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
220
Press button 4 in the turn indicator lever repeat-
edly until the oil level display appears in the
instrument cluster.
M dual clutch transmission: the oil level
appears in the top display.<
The oil level must be between the two mark-
ings.
A new measurement is taken automatically
each time the engine is started.
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK.
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 1 minute if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it can take up to
30 minutes to get an oil level reading.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil at the next opportunity, but
no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 221. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-
level monitor will be unable to display the
new value reliably.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
4 Oil level is too high.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
5 A value cannot be read at this time. The
engine is not yet warm.
Quick measurement
In addition to the automatic measurement, you
can also determine the current oil level manu-
ally, e.g. after adding engine oil, but such mea-
surements are less accurate.
1. Park the vehicle with a warm engine, i.e.
after an uninterrupted drive of at least
6 miles/10 km, on a horizontal surface.
2. Let the engine idle.
3. Press the computer button in the turn indi-
cator lever repeatedly until the oil level dis-
play appears in the instrument cluster.
4. Press the computer button for at least
2seconds.
The oil level is determined. A clock symbol
appears during measurement.
5. After approx. 1 minute, the current oil level
is displayed.
Display via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Turn the con-
troller until "Engine oil level" is selected and
press the controller. The oil level is dis-
played.
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating
engine oil level measurement..."
The engine oil level is measured. This can
take about 1 minute if the car is at a stand-
still on a level surface and the engine is run-
ning, or about 5 minutes while the car is
moving.
If engine oil was added, it can take up to
30 minutes to get an oil level reading.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil."
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil below. Add at least
0.5 US quart/0.5 liters, otherwise the oil-
level monitor will be unable to display the
new value reliably.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
> "Engine oil level too high"
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter-
val for engine oil"
Do not add engine oil. Before resuming your
trip, note the newly calculated distance
remaining to the next oil service, refer to
page 72. Have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the Con-
trol Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.
Add no more than 1 US quart/1 liter of oil, oth-
erwise too much engine oil can lead to engine
damage. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liters,
otherwise the oil-level monitor will be unable to
display the new value reliably.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
222
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.<
Your BMW center will be glad to answer
any questions regarding BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is categorized in SAE classes.
Approved oils belong to the 10W-60 SAE
class.<
Alternative oil types
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not
available, you can add small quantities of other
synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use
oils with the following specifications:
> Viscosity:
preferred: SAE 10W-60;
alternative: SAE 10W-40, SAE 5W-50 or
SAE 10W-50
> Specification:
API SJ/CF, API SK/CF or higher
Low ambient temperatures
The oils used at BMW factories for your vehicle
type are suitable for virtually any ambient tem-
perature. However, if the vehicle is operated at
temperatures below –47/–206 for extended
periods, your BMW center will be glad to rec-
ommend an optimal oil.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. If the loss of coolant is substantial, have the
cause eliminated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment
on the right-hand side of the cargo bay.
Remove the cover.
Wiper blades
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook
on the bottom, see arrow.
3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.
4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
the windshield, see arrow.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch, otherwise you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
For care of the headlamps, please follow the
instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Control elements, display components, part of
the exterior lighting and other interior equip-
ment in your vehicle are equipped with covered
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
224
light-emitting diodes as light sources. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if
such work is carried out improperly, the high
voltage in the system presents the danger of
fatal injuries.<
Access to the lamps
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the head-
lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
the catches towards the rear, see arrows,
and pull the cover forward and out.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover, oth-
erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the
lamps.
2. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and
take it out.
3. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
4. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
5. Reattach the cover.
Corner-illuminating lamp*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the
lamps.
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor
towards the right and fold it up.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
7. Reattach the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Turn signals, front
PY24W Silver Vision bulb, 24 watts
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover
in the wheel arch.
1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all
the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the
cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left, arrow 2, and
take it out.
4. Turn the bulb socket in the bulb holder to
the right for removal and replacement.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom
edge first and then turning both locks all the
way to the right.
Tail lamps
> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in
the fender.
1 Brake lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
3 Turn signal
4 Backup lamp
5 Tail lamp
6 Brake lamp
Fender-mounted lamps
1. Using a screwdriver, pry off the cover in the
cargo bay or release the turn-lock fastener
by turning it counterclockwise and remove
the cover.
2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and pull out.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
226
Lamps in the luggage compartment lid
1. Pry out the fastening plugs in the trim of the
luggage compartment lid using a screw-
driver and remove the trim.
2. Unfasten the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the trim of the luggage compart-
ment lid.
License plate lamp, center brake lamp
and side turn signal indicators
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Repairing a flat tire with the
M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire, your BMW M3 includes an
M Mobility System. With this system you can
apply a sealant to the inside of the tire to seal
the damaged section, restore the tire inflation
pressure and continue on your trip.
Safety measures in the event of a flat tire:
Park the vehicle as far away from moving
traffic as possible and on a firm surface. Switch
on the hazard warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake and engage first gear
or reverse. Have all occupants leave the vehicle
and move beyond the danger zone, e.g. behind
the guard rails.
If necessary, erect a warning triangle
*
or warn-
ing flasher
*
at a suitable distance. Adhere to
country-specific regulations.<
Preparations
The M Mobility System is located in the cargo
bay under the floor board.
If possible, leave any foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire in place.
Instructions on how to use the M Mobility
System can also be found on the device
itself.<
Before using the M Mobility System, fol-
low the instructions on the sealant bot-
tle.<
Remove the label with the speed restriction
from the sealant bottle and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
Please note the expiry date on the sealant
bottle.<
Components of the M Mobility System
1 Sealant bottle and label with speed restric-
tion
2 Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3 Connector and cable for the cigarette
lighter socket
4 Holder for the sealant bottle
5 Compressor
6 On/off switch
7 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla-
tion pressure
8 Screw on pressure gauge to reduce tire
inflation pressure
9 Hose to connect compressor and sealant
bottle or compressor and wheel
The connector, cable and connection hose are
stored in the compressor housing.
Using the M Mobility System
To repair a flat tire with the M Mobility System,
proceed as follows:
> Fill the sealant, refer to page 227.
> Distribute the sealant, refer to page 227.
> Produce the tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 227.
Filling the sealant
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape under
high pressure.<
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Screw connection hose 9 onto the connec-
tor of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that screw 8 on the pressure gauge
is closed.
4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the
defective wheel and screw filling hose 2 of
the sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of
the compressor so that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is switched off,
position 0.
7. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket in the interior of the vehicle, refer to
page 108.
8. With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the compressor and let it run for
approx. 3 minutes to fill the sealant. The
inflation pressure of the tire after filling is
unimportant.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle
connector and from the tire valve.
Return the M Mobility System to its storage
location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 2 miles/3 km to
evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/
60 km/h. If possible, do not fall below a
speed of 12 mph/20 km/h.<
Producing the tire inflation pressure
1. After driving approx. 2 miles/3 km, stop at a
suitable location.
2. Connect connection hose 9 of the com-
pressor directly to the tire valve.
3. Insert connector 3 into the cigarette lighter
socket in the interior of the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
228
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to 29 psi/
200 kPa. With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows:
> To increase the inflation pressure:
Switch on the compressor, position I. To
check the current inflation pressure set-
ting, briefly switch off the compressor.
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise the
device will overheat and may be dam-
aged.<
> To reduce the inflation pressure: turn
screw 8 on the pressure gauge.
If the inflation pressure is not maintained,
drive the vehicle a second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to
4.
Use of the M Mobility System may be ineffec-
tual for tire damage larger than approx. 0.16 in/
4 mm. Please contact the nearest BMW center,
refer to page 230, or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel if the tire can-
not be made roadworthy with the M Mobility
System.<
The tire inflation pressure must be at least
29 psi/200 kPa. If it is not, do not continue
driving.<
Continuing your trip
Do not exceed the maximum allowable
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h to avoid the risk
of an accident.<
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 85 for more information.
Have the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the
M Mobility System replaced as soon as possi-
ble.<
Changing wheels
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 231.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recy-
cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
secure the battery against tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 74.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 158.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to
page 124.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 43.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 104.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth-
erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and
remove it.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set
in holders on the distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
230
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
> Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone. This equipment
makes it possible to send an Emergency
Request even if no mobile phone is paired
with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 198.
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button for at least
2seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist Response
Center has been established, the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center will be able to initiate further
steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been estab-
lished. You will then be able to provide a
detailed description of the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW
Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance
The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to
assist you around the clock in the event of a
breakdown, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can
establish contact with BMW Roadside Assis-
tance for breakdown assistance directly via
iDrive, refer to page 194.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo bay. Press the tab to take it
out.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 219. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
232
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
It is stored in the onboard tool kit underneath
the cover on the right-hand side of the cargo
bay, refer to page 223.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper:
Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 54, otherwise the low-beam
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Ensure that the parking lock P is not
engaged as the rear wheels will otherwise
be blocked.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 56, note that the parking lock P is
engaged automatically after approx. 30 min-
utes, blocking the rear wheels.
If an electrical malfunction occurs or if towing
takes longer than approx. 20 minutes, manually
release the parking lock, refer to page 59.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph/50 km/h and a maxi-
mum distance of 30 miles/50 km, otherwise the
transmission can be damaged.<
BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on
a tow truck with a flat bed.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-
age may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck
Manual transmission:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
M dual clutch transmission:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Tow-starting
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
jump-start the engine, refer to page 231. Vehi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
234
cles with a catalytic converter should only be
tow-started when the engine is cold.
Manual transmission
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 54.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
M dual clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Vehicles with an M dual clutch transmission
cannot be tow-started. Jump-starting, refer to
page 231.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice command system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technical data
238
Technical data
Engine data
M3
Displacement cu in/cmμ 244/3,999
Number of cylinders 8
Maximum power output hp 414
at engine speed rpm 8,300
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 295/400
at engine speed rpm 3,900
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Technical data
240
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
M3
Curb weight lbs/kg 3,726/1,690
Approved gross weight lbs/kg 4,740/2,150
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,624/1,190
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/liters 15.9/450
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.6/63 Fuel grade: page 205
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 3.3/12.5
Window washer system For more details: page 65
including headlamp washers US qt/liters approx. 4.8/4.5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice command system
242
Short commands for the voice command
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change the scale in the assistance
window 141
{Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To open phone 185 {Phone}
To dial phone number 185 {Dial number}
To display phone book 185 {A to Z}
To select from phone book 185 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 185 {Top 8}
To redial 185 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 185 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 185 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 179 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 198 {BMW Assist}
To open "BMW Service" services 194 {BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 187 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 187 {BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 194 {Roadside Assistance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation 126 {Navigation}
To display current position 147 {Current position}
To open "Enter address" 126 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 126 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 131 {Input map}
To open "Information" 132 {Info menu}
To display address book 134 {Address book} or
{From address book}
To display destination list 133 {Destination list}
To switch on destination guidance 139 {Start guidance}
To switch off destination guidance 139 {Stop guidance}
To display route criteria 137 {Route preference}
To switch on voice instructions 142 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 142 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 143 {Repeat navigation info}
To show arrow display 140 {Arrow display}
To display map 141 {Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To open route 143 {Route menu}
To open "New route" 143 {New route}
To change scale 141 {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display towns/cities and streets along the
route 142
{Route list}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 69 {Car Data}
To display computer 69 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 70 {Trip computer}
To open speed limit 78 {Limit}
To open stopwatch 79 {Stopwatch}
To activate road-speed limit 78 {Limit on}
To deactivate road-speed limit 78 {Limit off}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice command system
244
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 153 {Audio}
To switch on radio 156 {Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 156 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 156 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 156 {FM All stations}
To select radio station 156 {Station} e.g. {Station WNYC} or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 156 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To open "Manual" 157 {FM manual} or
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To select preset radio station 158 {Preset ...}
e.g. {Preset 1}
To open strongest radio stations 157 {AM Autostore}
To open "SAT" 163 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 163 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 164 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 163 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 163 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 165 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 165 {CD}
To open CD changer 165 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 165 {CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 165 {CD 1...6}
To select track 166 {CD track ...}
To select a CD and track in the CD changer 166 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To select track 166 {Track ...}
To open DVD 165 {DVD player menu}
To switch on DVD 165 {DVD player}
To select music track on DVD 166 {DVD track ...}
To start sound output for external audio
device 171
{Audio Aux on}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
menu
Function Command
To open "Vent settings" 97 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 98 {Automatic programs}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks", 32 29 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 47 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open MDrive 48 {MDrive}
To open "Lighting" 63 {Lighting}
To open "BMW Service" 194 {BMW Service}
To open "Service requirements", 193 73 {Service requirements}
To open "Service", 193 73 {Service}
To display "Check Control messages" 76 {Check Control messages}
To set brightness of Control Display 80 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 67 {Units}
To open "Language", 142 79 {Languages}
To open "Time" 74 {Time}
To open "Date" 76 {Date}
To open "PDC" 81 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 85 {FTM}
To open "TPM" 87 {TPM}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
246
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions and
refers you to the page where
these texts can be found.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 82
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 62
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 230
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 100
"Activation time" 100
Adaptive Head Light 94
"Add digits" on the mobile
phone 186
Additives
– coolant 222
"Address book" in
navigation 134
Address for navigation
– deleting 136
– entering 126, 134
– selecting 135
– storing 134
– storing current position 135
"Add to destination list" 129
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 97
Adjusting the thigh support 41
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 153
Airbags 89
– indicator/warning lamp 91
– sitting safely 40
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate control 97
– ventilation 99
Air distribution
– automatic 98
– individual 97
Air flow rate 98
Airing, refer to Ventilation 99
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 206
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
"Air recirculation on / off" 47
Air supply
– automatic climate control 97
– ventilation 99
Air vents 96
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 204
Alarm system 34
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
– interior motion sensor 35
– switching off an alarm 34
– tilt alarm sensor 35
"All channels" for satellite
radio 163
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires
210
"All stations", displaying with
the radio 156
"AM", waveband 152, 156
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Antenna for mobile phone 178
Antifreeze
– coolant 222
– washer fluid 65
Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 34
Anti-theft system 29
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 240
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 240
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 106
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 69
Arrival time, refer to Starting
destination guidance 139
Arrow display for
navigation 140
"Arrow display" in
navigation 140
Ashtray
– front 107
– rear 108
Assist 193
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
Assistance window 20
– refer to iDrive 20
"Assist profile" 199
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 98
"Audio" 155, 159
Audio 152
– controls 152
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
"Audio", refer to Tone
control 153
Audio device, external 106
Automatic
– air distribution 98
– air flow rate 98
– BMW Teleservice Call 195
– cruise control 65
– headlamp control 92
– storing of stations 157
Automatic car washes 214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic climate control 96
– automatic air distribution 98
– settings via iDrive 97
Automatic curb monitor 46
"Automatic programs" with
automatic climate control 98
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 98
Automatic station search 157
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
– towing 232
– tow-starting 232
"Automatic ventilation" 100
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 98
"Auto Request" 195
"Autostore"
– on the radio 158
"AUX" 152, 171, 173
– AUX-In port 171
– USB-audio interface 172
AUX-In port 171
Average fuel consumption 69
– setting the units 71
"Avoid ferries" in
navigation 137
"Avoid highways" in
navigation 137
Avoid highways in
navigation 137
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
"Avoid tollroads" in
navigation 137
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 240
"A - Z" 185, 186
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 41
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 41
Backrest width adjustment 42
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 42
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 225, 226
Backup lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 225
Balance, tone control 153
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
pouch 231
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 233
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 106
Bass, tone control 153
Bass sounds, refer to Treble
and bass 153
Battery 228
– charging 228
– disposal 37, 228
– jump starting 231
– remote control 28
– temporary power failure 228
Battery renewal
– remote control 37
– remote control for vehicle 36
Being towed 232
Belts, refer to Safety belts 44
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 44
Beverage holders, refer to
Cup holders 107
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 98
Bluetooth, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
BMW
– car shampoo 216
"BMW
Assist" 194, 195, 196, 197
BMW Assist
– activating 198
– Concierge service 197
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 196
– Roadside Assistance 194
– services offered 193
– TeleServices 195
"BMW Contact" 188
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 188
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 212
"BMW Service settings" 199
BMW Teleservice Call
– automatic 195
– manual 195
BMW TeleServices 195
– displaying 196
– updating 196
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 107
Brake assist 82
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 72
Brake Force Display 89
Brake lamps
– replacing bulb 225, 226
– two-stage 89
Brake pads 114
– breaking in 114
Brake rotors 115
– brakes 114
– breaking in 114
Brakes
– ABS 82
– BMW Maintenance
System 212
– breaking in 114
– parking brake 56
– service requirements 72
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 115
Brake system 114
– BMW Maintenance
System 212
– breaking in 114
– disc brakes 115
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 230
Breaking in the clutch 114
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 114
Break-in period 114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
248
Brightness of the Control
Display 80
"Brightness" on the Control
Display 80
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 223
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/stop button 54
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
warning 6
"Call" 186, 197
Call
– accepting 184
– displaying accepted 186
– ending 185
– missed 186
– starting 185
Calling
– from phone book 185
– from Top 8 list 186
– redialing 186
Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 107
Capacities 241
Capacity of the cargo bay 240
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 228
Car care, refer to Care 214
"Car Data" 69
Care 214
– automatic car washes 214
– care products 214
– carpets 216
– CD/DVD drives 216
– chrome parts 215
– displays 216
– exterior 214
– fine wood parts 216
– headlamps 215
– high-pressure washer 214
– interior 216
– leather 216
– light-alloy wheels 215
– paintwork 215
– plastic parts 216
– rubber seals 215
– safety belts 216
– sensors and cameras 216
– upholstery and cloth
trim 216
– washing the car
manually 215
– windows 215
– wiper blades 215
Cargo, securing 117
Cargo bay
– capacity 240
– convenient access 36
– folding up the floor
panel 110
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 95
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside
33
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 117
– stowing cargo 117
– vehicle 116
Car jack
– jacking points 228
Car key, refer to Remote
control 28
Car phone 178
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 106
– refer to Mobile phone 178
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car radio, refer to Radio 156
Car shampoo 216
Car wash
– before driving into 56
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 114
"Categories" for satellite
radio 163
CBS Condition Based
Service 212
"CD" 152, 165
CD changer 165
– compressed audio files 165
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 169
– installation location 169
– playing a track 167
– random order 168
– repeating a track 168
– selecting a CD 165
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
CD player 165
– compressed audio files 165
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 169
– playing a track 167
– random order 168
– repeating a track 168
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
Center armrest 106
Center brake lamp, replacing
bulb 226
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
"Central locking"
30
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Central locking system 29
– convenient access 35
– hotel function 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 223
Changing the language on the
Control Display 79
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 71
Changing wheels 228
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 219
Check Control 77
"Check Control
messages" 78
Check Gas Cap 204
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 52
Child-restraint systems 51
Child-safety lock 53
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 51
Chrome parts 216
Chrome polish 216
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 107
Cleaning headlamps 64
– washer fluid 65
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 214
"Climate" 97
Clock 67
– 12h/24h format 76
– setting time 74
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Clothes hooks 106
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 55
Combined instrument, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 35
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
"Comfort" with EDC 84
"Communication" 184, 194, 1
95, 196, 197
Compact disc, refer to
– CD changer 165
– CD player 165
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 54
Compass
104
Computer 68
– displays on Control
Display 69
– hour signal 75
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
"Concert hall" for Tone
control 154
"Concierge" 197
Concierge service 197
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 116
Condition Based Service
CBS 212
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 31
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 108
Consumption, refer to
Average consumption 69
Consumption indicator, refer
to Average consumption 69
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 140
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display
– brightness 80
– changing the language 79
– switching off/on 21
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Control unit, refer to iDrive 16
Convenient access 35
– replacing the battery 36
Convenient operation
– glass roof 30
– glass roof with convenient
access 36
– windows 30
– windows with convenient
access 36
Coolant 222
– checking level 222
Coolant temperature 68
Cooling, maximum 98
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 222
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 222
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive Head
Light 94
Cornering lamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 94
Correct tires 210
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 95
Cross-hairs in navigation 131
Cruise control 65
Cruising range 69
Cup holders 107
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 240
"Current position" 147
Current position
– displaying 147
– entering 135
– storing 135
"Customer
Relations" 188, 196
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
250
Data, technical 238
– dimensions 239
– engine 238
– weights 240
"Date" 76
Date
– setting 76
– setting format 76
"Date format" 76
"Daytime running lamps" 93
Daytime running lamps 93
"Deactivated" 44
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 90
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 30
Defect
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 204
– glass roof 39
"Delete address book" in
navigation 136
"Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 187
"Delete data" in
navigation 136
"Delete" for mobile
phone 187
Destination address
– deleting 136
– entering 126, 130
Destination for navigation
– destination list 133
– entry 126
– home address 136
– manual entry 126, 130
– selecting from address
book 135
– selecting using
information 132
– selecting via language 130
– selecting via map 131
– storing 134
Destination guidance 139
– canceling voice
instructions 47
– changing specified
route 137
– displaying route 140
– distance and arrival 139
– starting 139
– terminating/continuing 139
– voice instructions 142
– volume of voice
instructions 143
Destination list for navigation
system 133
Destinations recently driven
to 133
"Details" for audio mode 173
"Dial" for mobile phone 185
"Dial number" 185
Digital clock 67
Digital compass 104
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 159
Digital Versatile Disc, refer to
– Drive for navigation DVD 152
Dimensions 239
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 63
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 142
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 134
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 238
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 94
"Display off" 21
Displays
– on the Control Display 16
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– coolant 222
– remote control battery 37
– vehicle battery 228
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 72
"Distance to dest." 70
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 81
Door key, refer to Remote
control 28
Door lock 31
"Door locks" 30, 31, 32, 73
Doors, emergency
operation 32
DOT Quality Grades 208
Draft-free ventilation 99
Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 107
Drive for navigation DVD 152
Drivelogic 60
Drive mode 58
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Drive-off assistant 84
Drive position, engaging, refer
to Selector lever
positions 57
Drive programs, refer to
Drivelogic 60
Driving around a traffic
congestion 146
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 92
Driving notes 114
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 84
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 140
Driving stability control
systems 82
Driving through water 115
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 114
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 99
"DSC" 48, 83
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
DVD
– drive for navigation DVD 152
DVD for navigation 124
"Dynamic route" in
navigation 137
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
– indicator/warning lamp 84
– M Dynamic Mode MDM 82
E
"EDC" 48, 49
EDC, refer to Electronic
Damper Control 84
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 152
Electric
– seat adjustment 41
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 204
– glass roof 39
– luggage compartment lid 33
– M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic 59
Electric seat 41
Electric seat adjustment 41
Electric steering wheel lock
– with convenient access 36
Electronic brake-force
distribution 82
Electronic Damper Control
EDC 84
– "Comfort" 84
– "Normal" 84
– "Sport" 84
Electronic oil level check 219
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 82
Emergency operation
– fuel filler door, manual
release 204
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 39
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 32
Emergency release
– luggage compartment lid
from inside 34
Emergency Request 230
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 230
"Enabled services" 198
"Enabled TeleServices" 196
"End call" 185
Engine
– breaking in 114
– data 238
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 68
– speed 238
– starting 55
– starting, convenient
access 35
– switching off 55
Engine compartment 219
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 222
Engine oil
– adding 221
– BMW Maintenance
System 212
– checking level 219
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 72
– possible displays 220
"Engine oil level" 221
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 238
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 238
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 55
"Enter address" 127
Entering a destination 127
Entering a destination
country 127
Entering a house number or
intersection 129
Entering an intersection 128
Entering a street 128
"Entertainment" 152
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 95
"Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 155
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 154
Error messages, refer to
Check Control 77
"ESN" 162
Event data recorders 213
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 114
Exterior mirrors 45
– adjusting 45
– automatic dimming
feature 46
– automatic heating 46
– folding in and out 45
External audio device 106
External audio device, refer to
AUX-In port 171
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 232
– for tying down loads 117
F
Fader, tone control 153
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Failure of an electrical
consumer 229
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 35
– switching off an alarm 34
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 44
Fastest route for
navigation 137
Fast forward
– CD changer 169
– CD player 169
"Fast route" in navigation 137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
252
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 100
First aid pouch 231
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 54
Flashlight, refer to LED hand
lamp 106
Flash when locking/
unlocking 31
Flat tire
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
Flat tire, repairing 226
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– indicating a flat tire 86
– indicator/warning lamp 86
– initializing the system 85
– malfunction 86
– snow chains 85, 211
– system limits 85
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 209
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 65
"FM", waveband 152, 156
FM, waveband 156
Folding in the mirrors, before
driving into a car wash 45
Folding up the floor panel 110
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 115
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 95
Forward position, engaging,
refer to Selector lever
positions 57
For your own safety 5
Frequency, selecting
manually 157
Front airbags 89
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
Fuel 204
– average consumption 69
– gauge 68
– high-quality brands 204
– quality 204
– specifications 204
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 241
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Fuel filler door 204
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction
204
Fuses 229
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 102
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 69
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 204
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
Gasoline engine, checking
engine oil level 219
Gear
– neutral 58
Gear change 59
Gear display, refer to Displays
in the instrument cluster 59
Gearshift lever
– manual transmission 56
Gearshifts
– manual transmission 56
General driving notes 114
Glass roof, electric 38
– closing after electrical
malfunction 39
– convenient operation 30, 31
– initializing 39
– opening, closing 38
– operation with convenient
access 36
– pinch protection system 38
– power failure 39
– raising 38
– remote control 30
Glove compartment 105
– LED hand lamp 106
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 124
Grills 96
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 240
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 56
Hand lamp, refer to LED hand
lamp 106
Hands-free system 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
"HD radio" 159
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 159
Head airbags 89
Headlamp control,
automatic 92
Headlamp flasher 63
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Head restraints 42
– front, removing 42
– rear, removing 42
– sitting safely 40
Heated
– mirrors 46
– rear window 99
– seats 43
Heating
– mirrors 46
– rear window 99
– residual heat 99
– seats 43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
253
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 96
Heating while at a standstill,
refer to Using residual
heat 99
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 117
Height, refer to
Dimensions 239
Height adjustment
– seats 41
– steering wheel 46
High beams 94
– headlamp flasher 94
– indicator lamp 13
High Definition Radio 159
High-pressure
washer 214, 215
High water, refer to Driving
through water 115
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 137
Hills 115
Holders for cups 107
Home address 136
"Home address" in
navigation 137
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 218
Hooks for shopping bags 109
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function 33
Hot exhaust system 114
"Hour memo" 76
"House number" in
destination entry 129
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Brake assist 82
Hydroplaning 115
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 159
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 67
ID3 tag, refer to Information
about the track 167
Identification marks, tire
coding 208
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 80
– assistance window 20
– automatic climate control 97
– changing language 79
– changing units of measure
and display format 71
– confirming selection or
entry 19
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– overview 16
– selecting a menu item 19
– setting the date and time 74
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– switching menu pages 19
– symbols 18
iDrive operating principle 16
Ignition 54
– switched off 55
– switched on 54
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 54
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 54
Ignition lock 54
i menu 18
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– MDrive 49
– M Dynamic Mode 83
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 88
Individual air distribution 97
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 47
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 206
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 86
Information
– on another location 132
– on country 132
– on current position 132
– on destination location 132
Information menu, refer to
i menu 18
"Information on
destination" 134
"Info sources" 73
Initializing
– after power failure 228
– compass, refer to Digital
compass, calibrating 104
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 85
– glass roof 39
"Input map" 131
Installation location
– CD changer 169
– navigation DVD drive 124
– telephone 106
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 142
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 94
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 102
Interesting destination for
navigation 132
"Interim time" 79
Interior lamps 95
– remote control 30
Interior motion sensor 35
Interior rearview mirror 46
– automatic dimming
feature 46
– compass 104
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
254
J
Jacking points 228
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 231
Jump starting 231
K
Key, refer to Remote
control 28
Keyless go, refer to
Convenient access 35
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient
access 35
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Knock control 204
L
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 92
– parking lamps/low beams 92
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 223
"Language / Units" 71
"Language / Units" in
navigation 125, 142
"Language" on the Control
Display 79
"Languages" in
navigation 125, 142
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 44
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 117
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 133
"Last seat pos." 44
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 52
Launch Control 62
Leather care 216
LED hand lamp 106
LED light-emitting diodes 223
Length, refer to
Dimensions 239
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 226
Light-alloy wheels 215
Light-emitting diodes
LED 223
Lighter 107
– connecting electrical
appliances 108
"Lighting" 63
Lighting
– instruments 94
– lamps and bulbs 223
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 92
Light switch 92
"Limit" 79
Limit, refer to Speed limit 78
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 117
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 32
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 35
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Low-beam headlamps
92
– automatic 92
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 41
Luggage compartment lid 33
– convenient access 36
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33
– emergency release 34
– locking or unlocking
separately 33
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 33
– opening manually 33
– remote control 30
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 117
Lumbar support 41
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 210
Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 212
Malfunction
– luggage compartment lid 33
– tires 86
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 77
Manual
– BMW Teleservice Call 195
Manual car wash 215
"Manual" on the radio 157
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 204
– glass roof 39
– luggage compartment lid 33
– transmission lock 59
Manual transmission 56
– tow-starting 234
Map
– changing scale 141
– destination entry 131
"Map direction of travel" 141
"Map facing north" 141
Master key, refer to Remote
control 28
Maximum cooling 98
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 210
"M DKG Drivelogic" 48
MDM, refer to M Dynamic
Mode 82
MDrive 48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
255
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
M dual clutch transmission
with Drivelogic 57
– kick-down 58
– Launch Control 62
– neutral 58
– reverse gear 58
– sequential mode 58
– Shift Lights 61
– shiftlock 58
– tow-starting 234
– unlocking transmission lock
manually 59
"M Dynamic Mode" 83
M Dynamic Mode MDM 82
– indicator lamp 83
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 239
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 43
M Engine Dynamics
Control 63
MENU button 16
Menus
– Control Display 17
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list, traffic
information 144
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 212
– for automatic climate
control 100
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 212
Microphone
– telephone 14
– voice input 14
Mirror dimming feature 46
Mirrors 45
– automatic curb monitor 46
– exterior mirrors 45
– heating 46
– interior rearview mirror 46
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 43
"Missed calls" 186
Missed calls 186
M Mobility Set 226
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 186
– adjusting volume 183
– calling 185
– ending call 185
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 106
– missed calls 186
– operation via iDrive 183
– redialing 186
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– Top 8 186
– touch tone dialing 188
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 106
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
"Monitor on / off" 47
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 186
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 165
"M settings" 48, 49
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 63
– refer to Wiper system 64
Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 16
Music tracks, refer to
Tracks 166
"Mute on / off" 47
N
"Navigation" 126, 132
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 142
Navigation drive, location 124
Navigation DVD 124
– drive 152
Navigation system 124
– address book 134
– changing a route 143
– destination entry 126
– destination guidance in
assistance window 124
– destination list 133
– displaying current
position 147
– entering a destination
manually 126, 130
– last destinations 133
– navigation DVD 124
– opening 126
– route display 140
– route list 142
– searching for a special
destination 132
– selecting destination using
information 132
– selecting destination via
map 131
– selecting route criteria 137
– starting destination
guidance 139
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance 139
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 139
– voice instructions 142
– volume adjustment 143
"Navigation voice
instructions" 125
"Navigation voice
instructions" via buttons on
the steering wheel 47
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 42
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 106
Neutral 58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
256
"New address" in
navigation 135
"New destination" 127, 131
"New route" 143
New tires 209
"Next entertainment
source" 47
"Normal" 63
"Normal" with EDC 84
North-facing map 141
Nozzles 96
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 238
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 233
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for On-Board Diagnosis 213
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 204
Odometer 67
Oil, refer to Engine oil 219
Oil consumption 219
Oil level 219
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 228
"On a new destination" in
navigation 133
"Onboard info" 69
Onboard tool kit 223
"On destination" 133
"On location" 133
Opening and closing
– convenient access 35
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
– using the door lock 31
– via the remote control 29
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 189
– adjusting volume 190
– canceling 189
– correcting phone
number 190
– dialing phone number 190
– placing a call 190
– redialing 190
– voice commands 189
– voice phone book 190
"Options" 197, 198
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 99
Output, refer to Engine
data 238
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate control 98
Outside temperature
display 67
– changing units of
measure 71
– in computer 71
Outside temperature
warning 67
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 68
P
Paintwork care 215
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 81
Park Distance Control PDC 81
"Parked car operation" 100
"Parked car ventilation" 100
Parked car ventilation 100
– activating switch-on
times 101
– preselecting switch-on
times 100
– switching on and off
directly 100
Parking
– vehicle 55
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 81
Parking brake 56
– indicator lamp 56
Parking lamps 92
Parking lamps/low beams 92
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 46
"Pathway lighting" 93
Pathway lighting 93
"PDC" 81
Personal Profile 28
"Perspective" 141
Phone book 183
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 187
– dialing 185
– most recent numbers 186
– selecting in phone book 186
– Top 8 186
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 38
– windows 37
Placing a call, refer to
telephone owner's manual
"Play" for satellite radio 163
Polish 216
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 100
Position
– displaying 147
– saving, refer to Storing
current position 135
"POWER" 48, 49
Power failure 228
Power windows 37
– safety switch 38
Power windows, refer to
Windows 37
"Presets", displaying with the
radio 156
"Presets" for satellite
radio
163
Pressure, tires 206
Pressure monitoring, tires 84
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
257
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 86
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Programmable memory
keys 21
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 38
– windows 37
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 231
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
R
Radio
– autostore 157
– controls 152
– High Definition Radio 159
– listening to stations 156
– sampling stations 157
– satellite radio 162
– selecting a
waveband 152, 156
– selecting the frequency
manually 157
– station search 157
– stations with best
reception 157
– storing stations 158
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 54
Radio readiness 54
– switched off 55
– switched on 54
Rain sensor 64
"Random", refer to Random
play 168
"Random all" for audio
mode 169
"Random directory" for audio
mode 169
Random play 168
"RDS" Radio Data
System 159
Reading lamps 95
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 225
– replacing bulb 225, 226
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 42
– folding down backrests 108
– folding head restraint down
and up 43
Rear turn signals
– replacing bulb 225
Rear ventilation 100
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 45
Rear window blind, refer to
Roller sun blinds 105
Rear window defroster 99
Rear window safety switch 38
"Received calls" 186
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Recirculated-air mode 98
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 98
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 41
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 79
"Redial" on the mobile
phone 186
Refueling 204
Releasing
– hood 218
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 69
Remote control 28
– battery renewal 36
– convenient access 35
– garage door opener 102
– luggage compartment lid 30
– malfunction 31, 36
– removing from the ignition
lock 54
– service data 212
"Repeat directory" for audio
mode 168
"Repeat" for audio mode 168
"Repeat track" for audio
mode 168
Replacement remote
control 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 223
Replacing tires 209
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 209
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 68
"Reset" 85, 87
– tone settings 155
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 155
"Reset" for stopwatch 79
"Reset to default" for
MDrive 48
Residual heat 99
Restraint systems
– for children 51
– refer to Safety belts 44
Reverse
– CD changer 169
– CD player 169
Reverse gear 58
– manual transmission 57
Road map 141
"Roadside Assistance" 194
Roadside
Assistance 194, 230
Roadside parking lamps 94
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 72
Roller blind
– sun blinds 105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
258
Roof load capacity 240
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 117
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 233
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 137
– arrow display 140
– changing 143
– display 140
– displaying streets and
towns/cities 142
– displaying town 142
– list 142
– map display 141
– selecting 137
– selecting criteria 137
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 45
Safety belts 44
– damage 45
– indicator/warning lamp 45
– reminder 45
– sitting safely 40
Safety systems
– airbags 89
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 82
– brake system 82
– driving stability control
systems 82
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
– safety belts 44
"SAT" 152, 162
Satellite radio 162
– displaying additional
information 163
– enabling 162
– selecting channel 163
– storing channel 163
"Scan"
– sampling radio stations 157
– sampling tracks on CD 167
Scan
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
– radio 157
"Scan all" for audio mode 167
"Scan directory" for audio
mode 167
Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 232
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 162
Sealant, filling 227
Seat adjustment
– electric 41
– mechanical 41
Seat and mirror memory 43
Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts'
reminder 45
Seat heating 43
Seats 40
– adjusting electrically 41
– adjusting the seats 41
– heating 43
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 43
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 43
– sitting safely 40
Securing cargo 111
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
"Select as
destination" 133, 197
"Select current speed" 79
Selecting a country for
navigation 127
Selecting an audio source 152
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for
navigation 141
Selector lever positions 57
Sequential M Gearbox with
Drivelogic
– Drivelogic drive programs 60
Sequential mode 58
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 230
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 230
Service data in the remote
control 212
"Service Info" 73, 195, 221
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 212
"Service Request" 188, 195
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 212
"Service
requirements" 73, 195, 221
Service requirements 72
"Servotronic" 48
"Set date" 76
"Set time" 75
"Settings" 199
Settings
– changing settings on the
Control Display 79
– clock, 12h/24h format 76
– configuring, refer to
MDrive 48
– date format 76
– language 79
Settings and information 71
"Settings" for MDrive 48, 49
"Settings" for unlocking 30
Settings menu, refer to
imenu17
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times
100
Shifting 59
Shifting gears
– manual transmission 56
Shift lever 57
Shift Lights 61
"Shift lights" 48
Shiftlock 58
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 59
Shift-up display, refer to Shift
Lights 61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
259
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Shock absorber control, refer
to Electronic Damper
Control EDC 84
Short commands for the voice
command system 242
Shortest route in navigation,
refer to Selecting route 137
"Short route" in
navigation 137
"Show current position" 132
"Show destination
position" 132
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
Side airbags 89
Side window blind, refer to
Roller sun blinds 105
Side windows, refer to
Windows 37
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 40
– with airbags 40
– with head restraint 40
– with safety belts 40
Ski bag 110
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 38
Slot for remote control 54
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 107
Snap-in adapter 191
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 106
Snow chains 211
Socket, On-Board Diagnosis
OBD 213
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 108
Song search, refer to Playing a
track 167
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 230
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 152
Spare fuses, 229
Spare fuses, refer to
Fuses 229
Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation
system 142
Speed
– with winter tires 210
Speed-dependent volume
control 153
Speed limit 78
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 78
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 154
"Sport"
63
"Sport Plus" 63
"Sport" with EDC 84
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 64
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 82
Start/stop button 54
– starting the engine 55
– switching off the engine 55
"Start guidance" 129
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 55
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 231
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 231
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 54
Start menu 17
"Start service" 194
"Start service" for BMW
Assist 197
"State / Province" in
destination entry 127
Station
– refer to Radio 156
"Status" 73
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 214, 215
Steering wheel 46
– adjustment 46
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– freely programmable
buttons 47
– lock 54
– locking with convenient
access 36
– MDrive button 48
– programmable buttons 47
– shift paddles 59
"Steering wheel buttons" 47
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 59
"Stopwatch" 79
Stopwatch 79
Storage 217
Storage compartments 106
Storage nets 109
"Store" for satellite radio 164
"Store in address book" in
navigation 135
"Store" on the radio 158
Storing current position 135
Storing radio stations 158
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory
43
Storing tires 210
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 106
"Street" in destination
entry 129
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 206
Sun blinds 105
Surface ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 67
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 154
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 55
Switching on
– audio 152
– CD changer 152
– CD player 152
– radio 152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
260
Switching on the hour
signal 75
Switching the cooling function
on and off 99
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 100
Symbols 4
– navigation system 146
– status information 20
– traffic info for navigation
system 143
T
Tachometer 67
Tail lamps 225
– replacing bulb 225
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 241
Technical data 238
– capacities 241
– dimensions 239
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telematics, refer to BMW
TeleServices, BMW
Assist 193
Telephone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 106
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Telephone, refer to Mobile
phone 178
"Telephone list" 47
Temperature
– automatic climate control 97
– changing unit of measure 71
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 68
Temperature display
– outside temperature 67
– outside temperature
warning 67
– setting the units 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 65
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 117
"Text language" 80
"Theater" for Tone
control 154
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 226
Through-loading system 108
Tilt alarm sensor 35
Tilt function, passenger-side
mirror 46
"Time" 75
"Time / Date" 75, 76
"Time format" 76
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 100
"Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation 101
"Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation 101
Tire inflation pressure 206
– loss 86
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
– resetting the system 87
– system limitations 86
– warning lamp 88
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 86
Tire Quality Grading 208
Tires
– age 208
– air loss 88
– breaking in 114
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 228
– condition 209
– damage 209
– inflation pressure 206
– labels 208
– minimum tread depth 209
– new wheels and tires 209
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 84
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
– puncture 86
– replacing 209
– size 208
– storage 210
– tread depth 209
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 209
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 210
– winter tires 210
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 143
"Tone" 153
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 153
– middle setting 155
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 223
"Top 8" for mobile phone 186
Torque, refer to Engine
data 238
Touch tone dialing 188
Tow bar 233
Tow fitting 232
– screw thread 232
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Reference
261
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Towing 232
– with manual
transmission 233
– with M dual clutch
transmission 233
Towing and tow-starting 232
Towing methods 233
Town/city for destination 127
"Town / City" in destination
entry 127
Tow rope 233
Tow-starting 232, 233
"TPM" 87
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 86
Tracks
– random play sequence 168
– sampling, Scan 167
– searching for 167
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 82
Traffic information for
navigation
– calling up 144
– display on route map 145
– during destination
guidance 146
– switching on/off 143
– symbols 146
"Traffic Info settings" 144
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
information 143
– driving around 146
Transmission
– Drivelogic 60
– Launch Control 62
– manual transmission 56
– reverse gear 58
– Shift Lights 61
– unlocking transmission lock
manually 59
Transmission lock, unlocking
manually 59
Transporting children
safely 51
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 117
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 209
Treble, refer to Treble and
bass 153
Treble, tone control 153
"Trip computer" 70
Trip computer 70
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 67
"Triple turn signal" 64
Triple turn signal activation 63
Trip odometer 67
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 33
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 239
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
– triple turn signal 63
Turn signals 63
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 117
U
"Unchanged" 48, 61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 208
"Units" 71
Units
– average consumption 71
– temperature 71
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 102
Universal mobile phone
preparation package, refer
to separate Owner's Manual
Universal remote control 102
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 35
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
– luggage compartment lid 36
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 35
"Update services" 196, 198
USB-audio interface 172
"USB" for audio
mode 171, 173
V
Vehicle
– battery 228
– breaking in 114
– cargo loading 116
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 219
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 239
– parking 55
– weight 240
"Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30
Vehicle jack 228
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 147
Vehicle storage 217
Ventilation 99
– draft-free 99
– in the rear 100
Ventilation, refer to Climate 96
Ventilation while at a
standstill 100
Vents, refer to Ventilation 99
"Vent settings" 97
Voice commands
– overview 23
– short commands 242
Voice instructions from
navigation system 142
– muting 47, 143
– repeating 47, 143
– switching on/off 142
– volume 143
Voice phone book 190
Volume 152
– audio sources 152
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 241
– mobile phone 183
– speed-dependent
control 153
– voice instructions 143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
262
Volume distribution
– front/rear 153
– left/right 153
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Warning triangle 231
Washer fluid 65
– content of the reservoir 65
Washer fluid reservoir 65
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 107
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 115
Water penetration 214, 215
Waveband with the radio 156
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 209
Weights 240
Welcome lamps 92
"Welcome light" 93
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 210
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 239
Wheels, new 209
Wheels and tires 206
Width, refer to
Dimensions 239
Windows 37
– convenient operation 30
– convenient operation with
convenient access 36
– opening, closing 37
– pinch protection system 37
– safety switch 38
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 64
Windshield wash 64
– filling capacity, reservoir 241
– nozzles 65
– reservoir for washer fluid 65
– washer fluid 65
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 223
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 64
Winter tires 210
– setting speed limit 79
– storage 210
Wiper blade replacement 223
Wiper system 64
"With highways" in
navigation 137
Word-matching principle for
navigation 138
Work in the engine
compartment
218
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 223
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 224
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to MDrive 48
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
01 41 0 014 958 ue iDrive
*BL0014958009*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 958 - © 02/08 BMW AG
